DVD Recorder
DVR-420H
DVR-520H
DVR-720H
®
Operating Instructions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING: No naked flame sources, such as
lighted candle, should be placed on the apparatus.
If naked flame sources accidentally fall down, fire
spread over the apparatus then may cause fire.
D3-4-2-1-7a_En
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC – +35 ºC (+41 ºF – +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install in the following locations
• Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial
light
This product is for general household purposes. Any failure
due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-
term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a
car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for
• Location exposed to high humidity, or poorly
ventilated location
D3-4-2-1-7c_En
even during the warranty period.
K041_En
VENTILATION: When installing this unit, make
sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation
to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10
cm at rear, and 10 cm at each side).
This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by NEC
corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC
Corporation.
WARNING: Slots and openings in the cabinet are
provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable
operation of the product and to protect it from
overheating, to prevent fire hazard, the openings
should never be blocked and covered with items,
such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains, etc. Also
do not put the apparatus on the thick carpet, bed,
POWER-CORD CAUTION
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check
the power cord once in a while. When you find it
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En
sofa, or fabric having a thick pile.
D3-4-2-1-7b_En
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel.
The cut-off plug should be disposed of and must
not be inserted into any 13 amp socket as this can
result in electric shock. The plug or adaptor or the
distribution panel should be provided with 5 A fuse.
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
appliance may not correspond with coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows ;
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be
connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or coloured red.
Do not connect either wire to the earth terminal of a
three pin plug.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
FOR USE IN THE UNITED
KINGDOM
After replacing or changing a fuse, the fuse cover in
the plug must be replaced with a fuse cover which
corresponds to the colour of the insert in the base
of the plug or the word that is embossed on the
base of the plug, and the appliance must not be
used without a fuse cover. If lost replacement fuse
covers can be obtained from your dealer.
Only 5 A fuses approved by B.S.I or A.S.T.A to
B.S.1362 should be used.
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
Blue
: Neutral
Brown : Live
If the plug provided is unsuitable for your socket
outlets, the plug must be cut off and a suitable plug
fitted.
D3-4-2-1-2-2_En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Switching DVD soundtracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
01 Before you start
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . 8
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 9
About the internal hard disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
06 Recording
About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
About HDD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Recording time and picture quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 47
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Simultaneous recording and playback . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . 56
Automatic recording from a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . 56
Recording from a DV camcorder
02 Connecting up
Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Front panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Extra features for use with compatible TVs . . . . . . . . 13
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using other types of audio/video output . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . 16
Connecting an external decoder box (1) . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting an external decoder box (2) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Plugging in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
(DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Recording from the DV output
(DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 59
Initializing a DVD-RW disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
03 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
07 Copying and back-up
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
One Touch Copy (HDD to DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
One Touch Copy (DVD to HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Copying from HDD to DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
HDD to DVD Copy List menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Recording the Copy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
HDD to DVD Copy List commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Copying from DVD to HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
DVD to HDD Copy List menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Recording the Copy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
DVD to HDD Copy List commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Using disc back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
04 Getting started
Switching on and setting up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and
recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Making your first recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using the Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . 33
08 Editing
05 Playback
The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Disc Navigator menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Editing VR mode Original, Video mode and HDD
content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Editing HDD groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Creating and editing a VR mode Play List . . . . . . . . . 84
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents
of a disc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Navigating discs and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Scanning discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
09 Disc History
Using the Disc History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
15 Index
10 The PhotoViewer
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
11 The Disc Setup menu
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HDD Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Finalize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
12 The Video/Audio Adjust menu
Setting the picture quality for TV and external
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 95
Audio DRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
13 The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Tuner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Video In / Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Audio In settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Audio Out settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Recording settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Playback settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
14 Additional information
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . 112
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
About DV (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Manual recording modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Language code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Country code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
On-screen displays and recorder displays . . . . . . . 120
Handling discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Storing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Damaged discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Hints on installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Moving the recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
CBhaepfteor 1re you start
•
Disc Navigator
The on-screen Disc Navigator makes finding your way
around the contents of a disc or the HDD easy. For
recordable DVD and HDD content, moving thumbnail
images are displayed for ease of use. The Disc Navigator
is also where you can edit HDD and recordable DVD
content.
Features
HDD
•
HDD recording
You can record up to 102 hours of video (in EP mode) on
the internal 80GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD) on the DVR-
420H/520H, or up to 204 hours on the 160GB DVR-720H.
•
Disc History
With both recordable DVD and a high-capacity HDD in
the same recorder, you have the flexibility to keep
recordings on the HDD for quick access anytime, or
record to DVD for archiving or playing on other DVD
players.
The Disc History screen shows disc information,
including how much free space remains for recording,
for the last 30 recordable discs loaded in the recorder.
Every time you load a recordable disc, the Disc History is
automatically updated with the latest information.
•
Copy between HDD and DVD
•
Home Menu
You can copy recordings from the HDD to recordable
DVD, or from DVD to the HDD. Usually you can use the
high-speed copy feature, which can copy an hour of video
in under two minutes (when recorded in EP mode using
a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 / 8x disc).
The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the
recorder’s features in one convenient place, from setting
up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and
editing a recording.
You can also choose to copy material at a different
recording quality from the original. For example, you
might want to copy a FINE mode (highest quality)
recording on the HDD to SP (standard play) quality on a
DVD so that you can fit other recordings on the same
disc.
•
Cinema surround sound in your home
Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS-
compatible AV amp/receiver to enjoy full surround sound
effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs.
•
Easy Timer Recording
Setting the recorder to record a program is simple from
the Easy Timer Recording screen. Set the channel to
record and the recording quality, then graphically set the
start and end times of the recording. That’s it!
•
One Touch Copy
One Touch Copy makes copying the currently playing title
from HDD to DVD, or DVD to HDD as simple as pressing
a button.
•
Program up to 32 timer recordings
You can program the recorder to record up to 32
VR mode
HDD
•
Chase play
programs, up to a month in advance, using the
Using chase play you can start watching a recording
before the recording has finished. For example, you could
set a timer recording for a program that you’re going to
miss the first 15 minutes of, then start watching while the
recorder is still recording the program 15 minutes ahead
of you.
®
*
VIDEO Plus+ system for easy programming if you
want. As well as single programs, you can specify daily or
weekly recordings, too.
This recorder is also compatible with VPS/PDC systems,
which ensure you don’t miss a timer recording, even if
the broadcast is not running to schedule.
•
Simultaneous recording and playback
®
*1
is a registered trademark of Gemstar
Development Corporation.
VR mode
HDD
Playback and recording for both DVDs and the built-in
hard disk drive (HDD) are completely independent. For
example you can record a broadcast program to either a
recordable DVD or the HDD, while watching another
recording you already made on the same DVD or on the
HDD.
The VIDEO Plus+ system is manufactured under
license from Gemstar Development Corporation.
•
One Touch Recording
Use One Touch Recording to start recording immediately
in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the ì REC
button, the recording time is extended by another 30
minutes.
6
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
•
Optimized recording
•
Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD
Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality
automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc
with the settings that you made.
Video mode
player
Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back
on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives
compatible with DVD-Video playback .
*
•
Auto Start Recording from satellite receiver or
other set top box
*
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-
With a satellite receiver or other set top box connected to
the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) inputs
of this recorder, you can start and stop recording
automatically according to the timer settings of the set
top box.
Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs
is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s
DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback
equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs
recorded in the DVD-Video format.
•
High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio
When recording using one of the high quality record
settings (FINE or MN32), the audio is recorded in
uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers
great sounding audio to accompany the high picture
quality.
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.
•
WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback
This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and
JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs.
•
Picture quality adjustment features
•
Disc Back-up
During playback, you can adjust various picture quality
settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the
recording picture quality. For example, if you want to
make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize
the picture quality before transferring it to disc.
The disc back-up feature gives you a convenient way to
back-up important material on DVD to another
recordable DVD disc. The material is first copied to the
HDD, then on to a second DVD disc.
HDD
•
Find what you want to watch quickly and easily
•
Recovery Recording
Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct
place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc or the
HDD that you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc
by title, chapter or time.
When a timer recording is set to use DVD but the disc
loaded at the time of the recording is unrecordable, the
program will automatically be recorded to the HDD.
HDD
•
Auto Replace Recording
•
Manual recording
This feature is useful for regular timer recordings of a TV
program which you don’t want to keep after watching.
Each time the program is recorded, it replaces the one
currently on the HDD. There’s no need to manually delete
it later.
In addition to the four preset recording quality modes
(FINE, SP, LP and EP), the manual recording mode allows
you to access 32 different recording quality/time settings,
giving you precise control over the recording.
•
Record to and from a DV camcorder (DVR-520H/
720H only)
Note on copying:
This recorder has a built-in DV (Digital Video) input/
output jack for connection to a DV camcorder. This
makes it ideal for transferring camcorder footage to DVD
or HDD for editing. You can also transfer DVD or HDD
content back to the camcorder if you need to.
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you
are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in
which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as
films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or
consented to by the rightowners.
VR mode
•
Safe, non-destructive editing
When you edit a DVD-RW, the actual content of the disc
(the Original content) is not touched. The edited version
(the Play List content) just points to various parts of the
Original content.
VR mode
HDD
•
Chapter marking
You can easily add chapter markers anywhere in your
recordings for easy editing.
7
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
What’s in the box
01
Note
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as
leakage and bursting. Please observe the following:
Please confirm that the following accessories are in the
box when you open it.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.
• Remote control
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries together—
although they may look similar, different batteries
may have different voltages.
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)
• RF antenna cable
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each
battery match the indications in the battery
compartment.
• Power cable
• These operating instructions
• Warranty card
• Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to
be used for a month or more.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
Putting the batteries in the remote
control
1
Open the battery compartment cover on the
back of the remote control.
Using the remote control
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote
control:
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
remote sensor.
2
Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery
compartment following the indications (ꢀ,ꢁ) inside
the compartment.
• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other
equipment located close to this unit.
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the
operating range of the remote.
• When the batteries run down or you change the
batteries, the remote control mode and TV preset
codes are automatically reset. See Remote Control
Set on page 99 and Setting up the remote to control
your TV on page 112 to reset them.
3
Close the cover.
• Use within the operating range and angle, as shown.
30
30
7m
• You can control this recorder using the remote
sensor of another Pioneer component using the
CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel
connections on page 12 for more information.
8
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD
writers may reject DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs. If you want
to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an
older recorder/writer, we recommend using Ver. 1.1
discs.
Disc / content format playback
compatibility
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorder
compatibility with DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs.
General disc compatibility
This recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc
types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally
feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc
packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as
recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable
format—see below for further compatibility information.
Model
Playable
Yes1,2,3
Yes1
Recordable
DVR-7000
No
DVR-3100/ DVR-5100H
No
1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.
2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.
3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.
DVD-Video
DVD-R
DVD-RW
CD-R/RW compatibility
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.
Audio CD
Video CD
CD-R
CD-RW
• Compatible formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super
VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA or
JPEG files
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file
systems are both compatible with this recorder.
Fujicolor CD
• Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD
•
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and
Video CD/Super VCD)
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only
•
is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
This recorder also supports the IEC’s Super VCD
standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super
VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two
soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the
widescreen size.
Compressed audio compatibility
• Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),
Windows Media Audio (WMA)
• Sampling rates: 44.1 or 48kHz
• Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended)
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes
• VBR WMA playback: No
VIDEO
CD
Super Video CD (Super VCD)
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec
8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be
playable but some parts of the specification are not
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)
DVD-R/RW compatibility
This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs.
Compatible media:
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No
(see also DRM in the Glossary on page 122)
• DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1 / 2x and Ver. 1.2 / 4x
• DVD-R Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x / 8x
Recording formats:
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for
the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do
not use for other file types)
• DVD-R: DVD-Video format (Video mode)
• DVD-RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD-
Video format (Video mode)
• File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these
limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these
limits are playable)
9
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility
Frequently asked questions
• What’s the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW?
The most important difference between DVD-R and
DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium,
while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium.
You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc
approximately 1,000 times.
®
The Windows Media logo printed on the box indicates
For more information, see About DVD recording on
page 45.
that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
• What’s VR mode?
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by
using Windows Media Player version 7, 7.1, Windows
Media Player for Windows XP, or Windows Media
Player 9 Series.
VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode
designed for home DVD recording. It allows flexible
editing of recorded material compared to ‘Video
mode’. On the other hand, Video mode discs are
more compatible with other DVD players.
®
®
®
®
• Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player?
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded
*
in Video mode are playable in a regular DVD player,
but they must be ‘finalized’ first. This process fixes
the contents of the disc to make them readable to
other DVD players as DVD-Video discs.
JPEG file compatibility
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2*
still image files
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode are playable in
some players.
*File format used by digital still cameras
This label indicates playback compatibility with
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video
Recording format). However, for discs recorded with
a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can
only be achieved using the CPRM compatible device.
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:4:2, 4:2:0
• Horizontal resolution: 160 – 5120 pixels
• Vertical resolution: 120 – 3840 pixels
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No
Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs
recorded using this recorder will play on other players.
• File extensions: .jpg, jpeg, jif, jfif (must be used for the
recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use for other
file types)
*
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders
/ 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders
that this on the disc then more can be reloaded)
Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs
is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s
DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback
equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs
recorded in the DVD-Video format.
PC-created disc compatibility
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be
playable in this unit due to the setting of the application
software used to create the disc. In these particular
instances, check with the software publisher for more
detailed information.
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.
This recorder supports the recording of ‘copy-once’
broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection
system (see CPRM on page 46) on CPRM-compliant
DVD-RW discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only
be played on players that are specifically compatible
with CPRM.
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are
not compatible with this recorder.
Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes
for additional compatibility information.
10
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
• Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of
editing can I do?
About the internal hard disk drive
Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD
recorder to edit discs. With DVD, you edit by making
a ‘Play List’ of what to play and when to play it. On
playback, the recorder plays the disc according to the
Play List.
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of
equipment. Please use the recorder following the
guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure.
We recommend that you back up your important
recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs in order to protect against
accidental loss.
Original
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
• Do not move the recorder while it is on.
• Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3 Chapter 1
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to form inside
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.
• While the recorder is switched on, do not unplug
from the wall socket or switch the electricity off from
the breaker switch.
Title 1
Title 2
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Play List
• Do not move the recorder immediately after
switching it off. If you need to move the recorder,
please follow the steps below:
Throughout this manual, you will often see the words
Original and Play List to refer to the actual content
and the edited version.
1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the
display, wait at least two minutes.
• Original content refers to what’s actually recorded
on the disc.
2 Unplug from the wall socket.
3 Move the recorder.
• Play List content refers to the edited version of the
disc—how the Original content is to be played.
• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be
lost.
• The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an
unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems
include playback unexpectedly freezing and
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs
of HDD failure.
If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will
be possible. In this case it will be necessary to
replace the HDD unit.
11
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Chapter 2
Connecting up
Rear panel connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ANTENNA
AC IN
OUT
IN
R
L
AUDIO
IN
OPTICAL
VIDEO
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
AV 2/AUTO START REC
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV 1 (RGB) - TV
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT
1
ANTENNA IN/OUT
6
DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN jack. The
signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for
connection to your TV.
For connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/
DTS/MPEG decoder or other equipment with optical
digital input.
2
OUTPUT jacks
7
AC IN – Power inlet
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for
connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
3
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector
Front panel connections
Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The video output is switchable between video,
S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on page 102 for how
to set this up.
STANDBY/ON
ꢂ
HDD
DVD
DV IN/OUT
PULL-OPEN
OPEN/CLOSE
REC ONE TOUCH COPY
DV IN/OUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
On the left side of the front panel a flip-down cover hides
a second audio/video input, consisting of an S-video and
standard (composite) video jack, and stereo analog
audio jacks.
4
AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV
connector
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB.
See AV2/L1 In on page 102 for how to set this up.
DV-520H/720H only: On the right side is the DV input/
output i.LINK connector. This is for connection to a DV
camcorder.
5
CONTROL IN
Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of
another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT
terminal and bearing the Pioneer ꢂ mark. Connect the
CONTROL OUT of the other component to the
CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini-plug cord.
12
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
EPG download
EPG download allows you to program a timer recording
directly from the electronic program guide displayed on
your TV.
Extra features for use with
compatible TVs
When this recorder is connected to a TV that features T-V
Link, EasyLink, MegaLogic, SMARTLINK, Q-Link, DATA
LOGIC or NexTView Link using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART
cable (not supplied), the following functions are
available:
See the manual that came with your TV for more
information on how to use this feature. Note that the SP
and LP options displayed on your TV correspond to the SP
and LP recording modes on this recorder.
• Direct TV recording
TV auto power on
• Channel preset download
• Electronic Program Guide (EPG) download
• TV auto power on
When you play a disc in this recorder, the TV
automatically turns on and switches to the correct video
input. See the manual that came with your TV for how to
use this feature.
• System configuration
System configuration
Direct TV recording
Basic settings, including language, country and TV
screen size (aspect ratio), can be downloaded from your
TV to help set up this recorder for use.
Direct TV recording allows you to record the TV program
that you’re watching, without having to worry about
whether this recorder is set to the same channel. See
Direct recording from TV on page 48 for more on this
feature.
Note
• For further details and compatibility information, see
also the manual that came with your TV.
Channel preset download
This feature allows you to set up the channel presets of
this recorder very simply using the channel presets and
preset names already in your TV. See Switching on and
setting up on page 25 and Auto Channel Setting :
Download from TV on page 100 for more on this feature.
13
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Easy connections
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs. Other
types of connections are explained starting on the following page.
Important
• These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, see
the following page for connecting up using the supplied audio/video cable.
• The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio.
The AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as
well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out on page 102 and AV2/L1 In on page 102 for how to set them up.
• Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and
unplugged from the wall outlet.
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR.
• If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect
it to the ANTENNA IN jack on this recorder and skip
the next step.
ANTENNA
IN
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
2
Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to
connect the antenna output of your VCR to the
ANTENNA IN of this recorder.
3
4
TV
3
Use another RF antenna cable to connect the
ANTENNA OUT of this recorder to the antenna input
on your TV.
AC IN
OUT
IN
R
L
4
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AUDIO
IN
OPTICAL
VI
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
AV 2/AUTO START REC
ODER)
AV
1
(RGB) - TV
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the
SCART AV connector on your TV.
5
5
Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/
AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
to a SCART AV connector on your VCR.
2
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
OUT
Note
• See the following page if you want to use one of the
other kinds of audio/video connection.
VCR
ANTENNA
IN
Tip
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power
Save on page 98).
14
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Using other types of audio/video output
If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output
jacks, as well as an S-video output.
Using the supplied audio/video cable
Using the S-video output
AUDIO
INPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
S-VIDEO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
1
2
TV
TV
2
1
ANTENN
ANTENN
AC IN
T
AC IN
T
IN
L
R
L
AUDIO
IN
OPTICAL
VIDEO
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
AV 2/AUTO START REC
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV
1
(RGB) - TV
AUDIO
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT
IN
OPTICAL
VIDEO
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
AV 2/AUTO START REC
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV
1
(RGB) - TV
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT
1
Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input
1
Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect
on your TV.
the S-VIDEO OUTPUT to an S-video input on your TV,
monitor (or other equipment).
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable for
the video connection.
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the
yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs
for correct stereo sound.
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video
cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match up
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs
for correct stereo sound.
15
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver
If you have a cable or satellite receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this
page. If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions on the next
page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box/satellite tuner.
Important
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
ANTENNA
IN
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/
1
2
AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
to a SCART AV connector on your satellite/cable
box.
TV
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
AC IN
OUT
IN
R
L
AUDIO
IN
OPTICAL
VI
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
AV 2/AUTO START REC
ODER)
AV
1
(RGB) - TV
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT
Note
• The diagram shows SCART video connections, but
you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video
connections.
3
1
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
OUT
Tip
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power
Save on page 98).
Cable/Satellite box
ANTENNA
IN
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
16
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting an external decoder box (1)
If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this
page.
Important
• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder.
• Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off
(in standby).
• For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be switched
on during recording.
• It is not possible to watch one TV program and record another using this setup.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
4
TV
ANTENNA
AC IN
OUT
IN
R
L
AUDIO
IN
OPTICAL
VIDEO
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
AV 2/AUTO START REC
ODER)
AV
1
(RGB) - TV
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT
3
2
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
Decoder
VCR/Satellite receiver
/Cable box
ANTENNA
IN
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
3
Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box.
receiver/cable box to the AV2/AUTO START REC
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector on this recorder.
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your
4
Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed
instructions.
AV connector to your TV.
17
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting an external decoder box (2)
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record scrambled channels received using the recorder’s built-in TV tuner.
Important
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
ANTENNA
IN
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/
AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
to a SCART AV connector on your decoder box.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
TV
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
1
2
A
AC IN
OUT
IN
R
L
Note
AUDIO
IN
OPTICAL
VID
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
AV 2/AUTO START REC
DER)
AV
1
(RGB) - TV
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT
• In order to use this setup, you will need to make the
following settings from the Initial Setup menu:
– Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the
Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 102).
– From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the
Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On
(see Manual CH Setting on page 100).
3
1
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
Decoder
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
18
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amplifier/receiver using the digital
optical output.
In addition to a digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection for
compatibility with all discs and sources.
You’ll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the ordinary video output (as
shown here), or the S-video output.
Important
• Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/receiver
properly (see Audio Out settings on page 104).
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
IN
TV
4
1
VIDEO
OUT
A/V
IN 1
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL
AV amp/
receiver
2
3
AA
AC IN
OUT
IN
R
L
AUDIO
IN
OPTICAL
VIDEO
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
AV 2/AUTO START REC
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV
1
(RGB) - TV
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
Note
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
• The diagram shows ordinary video connections,
but you can alternatively use an AV connector or
S-video connections, if they’re available.
2
Connect one of the DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL jack
on this recorder to an optical digital input on your
AV amplifier/receiver.
This enables you to listen to multichannel surround
sound.
Important
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’
your VCR using A/V cables. Always connect it
directly to your TV.
3
Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT and VIDEO
OUTPUT jacks on this recorder to an analog audio
and video input on your AV amplifier/receiver.
4
Connect the AV amplifier/receiver’s video
output to a video input on your TV.
19
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting a DV camcorder
(DVR-520H/720H only)
Connecting other AV sources
Using the front panel DV IN/OUT jack, it is possible to
connect a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW
recorder and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW
discs to DVD-R/RW.
Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder
DV IN/OUT
Important
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is
not compatible with digital satellite tuners or D-VHS
video decks.
1
2
DV IN/OUT
Analog camcorder
DV
IN/OUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
DV
IN/OUT
VCR
DV camcorder
1
Connect a set of audio and video outputs on
your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this
recorder.
This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or
camcorder.
1
Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV
in/out jack on your DV camcorder/deck to the front
panel DV IN/OUT jack of this recorder.
• You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
• The front panel connections make convenient
connections for a camcorder.
Plugging in
Before plugging in for the first time, make sure that
everything is connected properly.
2
Connect a set of audio and video inputs on your
VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this
recorder.
This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR
or camcorder.
• You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
AC IN
• Alternatively, you can use the AV2/AUTO START
REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector for
audio/video input and output with just one SCART
cable.
1
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC IN
inlet and the other end into a standard household
power outlet.
20
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
CChaoptnert3rols and displays
Front panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
STANDBY/ON
PULL-OPEN
ꢂ
HDD
DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
REC ONE TOUCH COPY
DV IN/OUT
15
14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
Illustration shows DVR-520H
1
ꢃ STANDBY/ON
9
ONE TOUCH COPY (page 62)
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
2
HDD
Press to switch to the hard disk drive (HDD) for recording
and playback. The button lights when HDD is selected.
10 ì REC
Press to start recording.
3
DVD
11 ꢀ
Press to switch to DVD for recording and playback. The
Press to stop recording.
button lights when DVD is selected.
12 ꢄ
4
5
6
IR remote sensor (page 8)
Disc tray
Press to start or restart playback.
13 ꢅ
Press to stop playback.
Front panel display
See Display on page 22 for details.
14 ꢆ OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
7
DV IN/OUT jack (DVR-520H/720H only) (page 12,
20, 56, 57, 59, 104, 117)
Digital input/output jack for use with a DV camcorder.
15 Front panel inputs (page 12)
Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front
panel input jacks. Especially convenient for connecting
camcorders and other portable equipment.
8
+/– (page 29, 31, 48)
Use to change TV channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc.
21
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
Display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12 13 14
15
11
1
ꢀ / ꢁ
10 Recording quality indicators (page 46)
Arrows indicate the copy direction between the HDD
(
FINE
) and DVD (
).
Lights when the recording mode is set to FINE (best
quality).
2
ꢄ PLAY / ì REC indicators
Lights during playback / recording; blinks when playback
/ recording is paused.
SP
Lights when the recording mode is set to SP
(standard play).
3
ꢇ ꢄ
(page 28)
The ‘ꢇ’ and ‘ꢄ’ indicators light to indicate that the HDD
or DVD is selected for recording/playback.
LP
Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long
play).
4
PL (page 78, 84)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is
in Play List mode.
EP
Lights when the recording mode is set to EP
(extended play).
5
2 3 (page 99)
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed,
the remote control mode is 1).
MN
Lights when the recording mode is set to MN
(manual recording level) mode.
6
REM
Lights when the character display is showing the
remaining available recording time.
11 Character display
12
(page 104)
7
V
Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast
are recorded.
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded.
8
R / RW
13 VPS / PDC (page 49)
Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or
DVD-RW.
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a
VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.
14 NTSC
9
(page 49)
Lights when playing NTSC format video.
Lights when a timer recording has been set.
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)
15 OVER (page 104)
Lights when the analog audio input level is too high.
AUTO (page 56)
Lights when Auto Start Recording has been set, and
during Auto Start Recording.
22
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
7
DVD playback functions
AUDIO (page 29, 43, 44)
Remote control
Changes the audio language or channel. (When the
recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner
audio.)
1
2
4
6
STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH
COPY
OPEN/CLOSE
ꢆ
3
ꢃ
SUBTITLE
(page 43)
Displays/changes the subtitles included in
multilingual DVD-Video discs.
HDD
DVD
5
7
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
ANGLE
PLAY MODE
TV/DVD
8
9
ABC
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
ANGLE
(page 44)
INPUT
SELECT
GHI
PQRS
JKL
Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle
scenes.
11
10
TUV
CHANNEL
VIDEO Plus+
CLEAR
12
15
8
PLAY MODE (page 40)
+
CLEAR
13
14
Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features such
as search, repeat and program play).
DISC NAVIGATOR
TOP MENU
PLAY LIST
MENU
9
TV/DVD (page 29)
ENTER
16
17
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the
picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’,
in which you get picture and sound from the recorder’s
tuner (or an external input).
HOME
MENU
RETURN
18
REV SCAN
PLAY
FWD SCAN
CM SKIP
PAUSE
STOP OK
19
10 Alphanumeric buttons and CLEAR
CASE
SELECTION
PREV
REC
NEXT
STEP/SLOW
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection;
channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also
be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on.
ꢉ
ꢈ
STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC
20
ì
DISC
HISTORY
NAVI
CHP
MARK
EASY
TIMER
MARK
Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again.
21
23
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL
DISPLAY
ꢃ
INPUT
SELECT
22
24
11 INPUT SELECT (page 56)
Press to change the input to use for recording.
TV DIRECT
REC
VOLUME
12 CHANNEL +/– (page 29)
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.
DVD RECORDER
13 VIDEO Plus+ (page 52)
Press, then use the number buttons to enter a
PlusCode programming number for timer recording.
1
ONE TOUCH COPY (page 62)
®
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
14 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 36, 76) / TOP MENU
(page 31)
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top
menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded.
2
Remote control indicator
Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a
TV (page 112) and when setting the remote control mode
(page 99).
15 PLAY LIST (page 78, 84) / MENU (page 31)
Press to switch between Original and Play List content on
VR mode discs, or display the disc menu if a DVD-Video
disc is loaded.
3
ꢃ STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
4
ꢆ OPEN/CLOSE
16 ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to
select the currently highlighted option.
Press to open/close the disc tray.
5
HDD (page 28)
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording or
playback.
17 HOME MENU (page 33)
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can
navigate all the functions of the recorder.
6
DVD (page 28)
Press to select the DVD for recording or playback.
18 RETURN
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or
display.
23
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
19 Playback controls (page 30)
21 DISC HISTORY (page 89)
Press to display summary information (disc name,
recording time left, etc.) from the last 30 recordable
discs loaded.
ꢊ REV SCAN / FWD SCAN ꢋ (page 38)
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press
again to change the speed.
NAVI MARK (page 37)
Press to select a thumbnail picture for the current
title for use in the Disc Navigator screen.
ꢄ PLAY
Press to start playback.
ꢌ PAUSE
Press to pause playback or recording.
CHP MARK (page 81)
Press to insert a chapter marker when playing/
recording a VR mode DVD-RW disc or the HDD.
ꢅ STOP
Press to stop playback.
22 DISPLAY (page 33)
Displays/changes the on-screen information displays.
CM BACK (commercial back)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward
through the audio or video playing.
23 TV CONTROL (page 112)
After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward
through the audio or video playing.
24 TV DIRECT REC (page 48)
Press to start recording whatever channel your TV is set
to.
ꢍ PREV / NEXT ꢎ
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/
track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu
page.
ꢉ STEP/SLOW ꢈ (page 39)
During playback, press to start slow-motion
playback; while paused, press to show the previous
or next video frame.
20 Recording controls (page 28)
ì REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.
ꢀ STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
REC MODE (page 47)
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode
(picture quality).
TIMER REC (page 51)
Press to set a timer recording from the standard
Timer Recording screen.
EASY TIMER (page 50)
Press to set a timer recording from the Easy Timer
Recording screen.
24
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Chapter 4
Getting started
1
Switch on your TV and set the video input to this
recorder.
Switching on and setting up
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you
can make several basic settings using the Setup
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video and audio
output settings.
2
Press the ꢃ STANDBY/ON button on the remote
control or the front panel to switch on.
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should
display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the
Initial Setup menu; see page 99).
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting
to use the recorder.
• If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using
a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will
take a few seconds to download country, TV screen
size and language information. (Check the manual
that came with your TV for compatibility information.)
STANDBY/ON
ꢃ
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ(cursor up/down) buttons to choose
a language, then press ENTER.
Initial Setup
Language
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
On S
Front
Powe
Remo
Setup
English
français
Deutsch
Italiano
Español
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
4
Press ENTER to start setting up using the Setup
ENTER
Navigator.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Clock
Inpu
On S
Fron
Pow
Complete this setup before you
start using your recorder.
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Start
Cancel
Rem
Setup
Please use the Initial Setup if you
want to make more detailed settings.
• If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press ꢃ
(cursor down) to select Cancel, then press ENTER to
exit the Setup Navigator.
5
Select the Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or
‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’, then press
ENTER.
DVD RECORDER
Initial Setup
Auto Channel Setting
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Inpu
On S
Fron
Pow
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto Scan
Download from TV
Do not set
Rem
Setup
25
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
• Select Do not set if you want to skip setting up the
channels (because they have already been set up, for
example).
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
that broadcasts a time signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
• You can only use the Download from TV feature if
you connected this recorder to your TV using a
fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable connected to the
AV1(RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this
function (check your TV’s instruction manual for
more details).
Initial Setup
Auto Clock Setting
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
Date
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On S
Time
Front
Powe
Pr 1
Clock Set CH
Remo
Setup
Start
•
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to
choose your country, then press ENTER.
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After
you see that the time has been set, select Next to
proceed.
Initial Setup
Country Selection
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Remo
Setup
Country
UK
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Initial Setup
Auto Clock Setting
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
Date
THU 01
01
2004
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On S
11 20
Time
Front
Powe
Pr 1
Clock Set CH
Remo
Setup
Start
Next
•
Auto-tuning channels
The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the
channel presets.
If the time could not be set automatically, press
RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select
Manual.
Tuning
11/107
Cancel
•
Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
•
Downloading channels from your TV
signals, you can set the clock manually.
Use the Download from TV option to download all the
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to set
your time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
channels that your TV is tuned to.
Downloading
Pr 5
to GMT.
Cancel
Initial Setup
6
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, or
Basic
Tuner
Clock
Manual Clock Setting
Input
1/2
‘Manual’ to set the clock manually, then press
ENTER.
England
London
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On S
Time Zone
Front
Powe
Remo
Off
Summer Time
Setup
Initial Setup
Clock Setting
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Press ꢃ (cursor down) then use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor
left/right) buttons to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for
summer time, then press ENTER.
Auto
Manual
Remo
Setup
Select On if you are currently using summer time.
•
Auto clock setting
Initial Setup
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the program. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.
Basic
Tuner
Clock
M
anual Clock Setting
1/2
Input
England
London
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On S
Time Zone
Front
Powe
On
Summer Time
Remo
Setup
26
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then
press ENTER to make all the settings.
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select Dolby
Digital, Dolby Digital, DTS or PCM only, then press
ENTER.
Initial Setup
• Check the operating instructions that came with your
AV amplifier/receiver if you’re not sure what it’s
compatible with.
Manual Clock Setting
Clock
Basic
Tuner
2/2
Input
On Sc
Date
THU 01
01
00
2004
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Time
Front
00
Powe
Remo
9
Is your AV amplifier/receiver compatible with 96
kHz PCM digital audio?
England
London
Time Zone
Setup
On
Summer Time
Initial Setup
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to change
96kHz PCM Compatible
Clock
Basic
Tuner
the value in the highlighted field.
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Compatible
Not Compatible
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to move
from one field to another.
RemoDon't Know
Setup
• You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in
the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN.
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
Compatible, Not Compatible, or Don’t Know, then
press ENTER.
7
Select the TV screen type, ‘Standard (4:3)’ or
‘Wide (16:9)’.
• Check the operating instructions that came with your
AV amplifier/receiver if you’re not sure.
Initial Setup
TV Screen Size
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
On S
Front
Powe
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
10 Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select
‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.
Wide (16:9)
Standard (4:3)
Remo
Setup
Initial Setup
Basic
Clock
Tuner
Input
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select, then
Setup is complete!
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On Sc
Enjoy using your DVD recorder!
press ENTER.
Front
Powe
Finish Setup
Go Back
Remo
Setup
8
Is this recorder connected to an AV amplifier/
receiver for digital audio?
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.
Initial Setup
AV Amp Digital Connect
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Remo
Setup
Other settings you can make
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Connected
Not Connected
After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be
ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. It’s possible,
however, that you may want to make a couple of
additional settings, depending on how the recorder is set
up for terrestrial TV broadcasts.
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
Connected, or Not Connected, then press ENTER.
• Manual channel setting – This setting lets you skip
channels where there is no station, as well as
manually tune to stations. See Manual CH Setting on
page 100.
• If you select Not Connected, that completes the
setup. Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or
select Go Back if you want to go back and start again.
• VIDEO Plus+ channel setting – This setting lets you
assign guide channels to ensure that the VIDEO
Plus+ programming system works correctly. See Set
VIDEO Plus+ CH on page 101.
• Select the digital audio formats your AV amplifier/
receiver is compatible with.
Initial Setup
• Setting up the remote to control your TV – You can set
up the supplied remote control to control many
brands of TV. See Setting up the remote to control your
TV on page 112.
AV Amp Compatibility
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital,DTS
PCM only
Remo
Setup
27
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
1
If they aren’t already on, switch on your TV and
this recorder.
Press ꢃ STANDBY/ON to switch on.
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for
playback and recording
• Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this
recorder.
The HDD and DVD buttons (remote control and front
panel) are used to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for
playback and recording. The indicator in the front panel
display shows which is currently selected.
2
Press HDD to record to the HDD, or DVD to record
to a recordable DVD.
If you choose to record to the HDD, skip to step 5 now.
3
Press ꢆ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.
ꢆ
ꢃ
4
Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the
HDD
DVD
label side face-up, using the disc guide to align the
disc.
• When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the
recorder will take a moment to initialize it for
recording.
Making your first recording
5
Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV
channel you want to record from.
• You can also use the +/– buttons on the front panel if
the recorder is stopped.
This quick guide shows you how to make a basic
recording of a TV program on either the HDD, or to a
recordable DVD.
• Channel presets are numbered 1–99.
Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 6
(Recording).
• If the recorder is connected to your TV using a SCART
cable and your TV supports Direct Recording, it’s
possible to quickly start recording whatever channel
your TV is tuned to. See Direct recording from TV on
page 48 for detailed instructions.
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
ꢆ
ꢃ
6
7
Press ì REC to start recording.
HDD
DVD
• By default, the recording will be in SP (standard play)
mode, which will give you around two hours of
recording from a blank DVD disc.
• You can pause recording by pressing ꢌ PAUSE.
Press ì REC or ꢌ PAUSE again to restart recording.
CHANNEL
When you want to stop recording, press
ꢀ STOP REC.
Playing back your recording
The TV program you just recorded should be on the HDD
or DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters.
PLAY
•
Press ꢄ PLAY to start playback.
STOP
If you want to stop playback before the end of the
recording, press ꢅ STOP.
REC
STOP REC
ì
DVD RECORDER
28
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also
select the language.
Using the built-in TV tuner
NICAM A
Regular
NICAM B
Changing TV channels
NICAM A+B
There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note
that you can’t change the TV channel during playback,
recording or during recording standby.
• You can also select the language for a non-NICAM
bilingual broadcast.
A (L)
B (R)
A + B (L+R)
• When watching a recording made from an external
input with Bilingual recording selected (see External
Audio on page 103), you can switch the audio
channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R).
CHANNEL
ENTER
L
R
L+R
• CHANNEL +/– buttons on the remote
• Number buttons on the remote – For example, to
select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34,
press 3, 4, ENTER.
Note
• When recording to the HDD, or in Video mode, or in
VR mode using the FINE/MN32 setting, only one
channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this
case, decide which language you want to record
before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording
setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 104).
• +/– buttons on the front panel
Note
• Channel presets are numbered 1–99.
• You can’t change TV channels during playback or
recording, or while in recording standby.
Switching between TV and DVD
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in
TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),
or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV
mode’).
Changing audio channels
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or
external input signal.
During playback or when a menu is being displayed on-
screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV
and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting.
AUDIO
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.
•
Press AUDIO to change the audio.
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.
TV/DVD
• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on
page 103) is set to NICAM and you are watching a
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM
and Regular (non-NICAM) audio.
•
Press TV/DVD to switch between TV mode and
NICAM
DVD mode.
Regular
29
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Basic playback
04
3
4
Press ꢆ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.
Load a disc.
This section shows you how to use your recorder for
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of
video from the HDD. More playback features, such as
repeat and program play, are covered in the next chapter.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-
sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to
play face down).
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read
the note on page 32.
Important
5
Press ꢄ PLAY to start playback.
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means
playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a
function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it
is specified.
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor) buttons and ENTER to navigate
DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and
ENTER for Video CD menus.
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This
is not a malfunction.
• When playing video from the HDD, playback will
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.
• See the following sections for more details on playing
specific kinds of discs.
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
ꢆ
ꢃ
6
7
To stop playback, press ꢅ STOP.
When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.
• To open/close the disc tray, press ꢆ OPEN/CLOSE.
Remove the disc before putting the recorder into
standby.
• Press ꢃ STANDBY/ON to switch the recorder into
standby.
ENTER
PLAY
STOP
ꢉ
ꢈ
DVD RECORDER
1
Press ꢃ STANDBY/ON to switch on.
Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the
correct video input.
2
Press HDD to playback from the HDD, or DVD to
play a DVD.
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 5 below.
30
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Playing DVD discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.
Playing from the HDD
The table below shows the basic playback controls when
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).
PLAY
PLAY
Press to start playback.
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-
back starts from the place last stopped.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-
back starts from the place last stopped.
Playback automatically stops after the end
of a title is reached.
STOP
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing ꢄ PLAY. (Press ꢅ STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
STOP
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing ꢄ PLAY. (Press ꢅ STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
when paused.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(You can also use the front panel +/– but-
tons to do this during playback.)
to increase the scanning speed.
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(You can also use the front panel +/– but-
tons to do this during playback.)
Except VR mode: During playback, enter a
chapter number then press ENTER to skip
directly to that chapter within the currently
playing title.
On some discs, you can also use the num-
ber buttons to select numbered items in
the disc menu.
During playback, enter a title number then
press ENTER to skip directly to that title.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
CLEAR
ENTER
CLEAR
VR mode only: During playback, enter a
title number then press ENTER.
All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry
and start again.
ENTER
BACK CM SKIP
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips
backward/forward progressively up to a
maximum of 10 minutes forward or three
minutes back.
BACK CM SKIP
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips
backward/forward progressively up to a
maximum of 10 minutes forward or three
minutes back.
STEP/SLOW
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
ꢉ
ꢈ
STEP/SLOW
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
ꢉ
ꢈ
Press to display the ‘top’ menu or menu of
a DVD-Video disc (these are often the
same).
TOP MENU
MENU
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-
Video disc menus; press ENTER to select
items.
ENTER
RETURN
Press to return to the previous level of a
DVD-Video disc menu.
31
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
audio CDs, and WMA/MP3 files.
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
Video CD/Super VCDs.
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you
can select what to watch.
PLAY
Press to start playback.
STOP
Press to stop playback.
PLAY
Press to start playback.
Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-
screen, playback starts from the place last
stopped.
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
CD and MP3 only: Press to start scanning.
STOP
Press to stop playback.
Press again to increase the scanning
speed. (There are two scan speeds; the
current scan speed is shown on-screen.)
Video CD only: You can resume playback
from the same point by pressing ꢄ PLAY.
(Press ꢅ STOP again to cancel the resume
function.)
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next track (or
folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (You can also
use the front panel +/– buttons to do this
during playback.)
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
During playback, enter a track number
then press ENTER to skip directly to that
track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
to increase the scanning speed.
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next track. (You
can also use the front panel +/– buttons to
do this during playback.)
CLEAR
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to
display the previous/next page.
ENTER
During playback, enter a track number
then press ENTER to skip directly to that
track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
Note
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the
recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/
receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be
output through the analog outputs. Also make sure
that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button
(see Switching audio channels on page 44).
CLEAR
While a PBC menu screen is displayed,
use to select numbered menu items.
ENTER
BACK CM SKIP
Video CD only: Each press skips backward/
forward progressively up to a maximum of
10 minutes forward or three minutes back.
Note that this function doesn’t work when
playing in PBC mode.
• Scanning doesn’t work with WMA tracks.
STEP/SLOW
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
ꢉ
ꢈ
While paused, press to advance a single
frame (forward direction only).
RETURN
Press to display the disc menu of a Video
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.
32
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Note
Note
• When playing in PBC mode, some playback features,
such as search, repeat and program play are not
available. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in
non-PBC mode by pressing ꢎ to start playback
instead of ꢄ PLAY.
• Some options in the Home Menu may be grayed out
sometimes, indicating that they are not available at
the present time. For example, the Photoviewer
option is grayed out unless there is a disc loaded that
contains JPEG image files.
Using the Home Menu
Displaying disc information on-
screen
From the Home Menu screen you can access all the
features of the recorder. Press HOME MENU to display
the Home Menu screen:
You can display various on-screen information about the
disc loaded or the HDD.
Timer Recording
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
ꢆ
ꢃ
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
HDD
DVD
Disc History
PhotoViewer
DV Record
DVR-520H/720H screen
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor) buttons followed by ENTER
to select the option you want. To exit the Home Menu,
press HOME MENU.
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
ꢉ
ꢈ
DISPLAY
Home menu options
Disc Setup (page 92)
Timer Recording
(page 49)
1
Press DISPLAY repeatedly to display/change the
Disc Navigator (page 36, Initial Setup (page 97)
page 76)
on-screen information.
• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the
status of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable disc).
Copy (page 61)
Video/Audio Adjust
(page 94)
Disc History (page 89)
Play Mode (page 40)
• The on-screen display automatically disappears after
150 minutes.
PhotoViewer (page 90)
DV Record (DVR-520H/
720H only) (page 57)
2
To hide the information display, press DISPLAY
repeatedly until it disappears.
The example displays below are a guide only; actual
displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc.
33
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
5
Recording time remaining
HDD and removable disc activity display
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD and DVD buttons to
switch between the two kinds of display.
Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in
the current recording mode.
6
Preset name and number
The example displays below show high-speed copying
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.
Shows the preset name and preset number for the
currently selected channel.
7
Audio mode
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel
preset (Mono, Stereo, etc.).
HDD
DVD-RW Video
Remain 10h35m
Stop
Hi-Speed Copy
0h08m left
Remain –h––m
Stop
8
Copy control information
Shows recording restrictions of the current channel
program.
9
Disc name
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
Shows the disc name.
(For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD
audio tracks; for example, Multi-format: WMA/MP3.)
HDD
DVD-RW Video
Remain 10h35m
Chase Play
Rec
Remain 0h52m
Stop
10 Finalized
Shows Finalized if a recordable DVD is finalized.
11 TV/DVD mode
Shows the current mode of the recorder (see Switching
Recording time
between TV and DVD on page 29).
Relative playback position
Stop display 2
Stop display 1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ꢅStop
DVD-RW VR
Original
ABC Pr 1
Stereo
Copy Once
ꢅStop
DVD-RW VR
Original
ABC Pr 1
Stereo
Copy Once
Resume
FINE (1h00m/DVD)
Finalized
14:52 MON 15/11/2004
Rem. 0h35m
Titles
Lock Disc
: Original 99
: On
Play List 15
Disc Name
: Comedy shows
DVD Mode
TV Mode
9 10
11
1
2
Date and time
Number of titles/tracks on disc
1
DVD-RW Original / Play List
If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback
is currently set to Original or Play List.
For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play
List titles are shown separately.
During preview playback of the Copy List, this shows
Copy List.
Play display 1
2
Disc type and mode
1
2
3
4
5
Shows the disc type (HDD, DVD-R, DVD-RW, CD, etc.),
and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable (VR
or Video).
ꢄPlay
DVD-R Video Chapters 15
Title Total 0. 11. 52
3–2
0. 00. 15
3
Recording mode and time
Shows the current recording mode (FINE, SP, LP, etc.),
and the total recording time of the disc.
DVD Mode
4
Resume
Shows Resume if playback can be resumed from the last
place stopped.
34
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
1
2
Number of chapters in title
4
Remaining recording time available
Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current
recording mode.
Current title and chapter number
(For CD/Video CD/Super VCD, shows current track; for
WMA/MP3, shows current folder and track; for JPEG
disc, shows current folder and file.)
5
Recording mode
Shows the current recording mode (FINE, SP, LP, etc.),
and the total recording time of the disc.
3
Elapsed title time
(For CD, WMA, MP3, Super VCD, shows elapsed track
time; for Video CD, shows elapsed disc time.)
Note
• When using the simultaneous play and record
feature, the display shows information for playback
only.
4
5
Total running time of title
Angle indicator
Lights during multi-angle scenes.
• During real-time copy, the copy source playback
information is displayed.
Play display 2
• Data transfer rate shows the amount of video and
audio information recorded on the disc. It is not an
indication of picture/audio quality.
1
2
3
4
5
• The Video mode disc displays become the same as a
DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.
ꢄPlay
3–2
0. 00. 15
!
DVD-R Video Chapter Time 0. 00. 21
Chapter Total 0. 01. 52
ꢌꢌꢌꢌꢌꢌꢌ
Hi-Speed Copy
Title Name
• The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis
is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the
displayed record setting.
4.32Mbps
: 21/11 Football match
• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are
approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This
is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV
broadcasts versus DVD.
1
Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback,
copy, disc back-up
Indicates that recording, copying or back-up is in
progress.
• The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time
display when the disc is paused.
2
3
4
Elapsed chapter time
Total running time of chapter
Data transfer rate
• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that
the broadcast TV program contains copy control
information.
Shows the current data rate being read from the disc.
5
Copy protected material (!)
Shows ‘!’ if the playback material is copy-once protected.
Recording display
1
2
3
4
ìRec
DVD-R Video
3
0. 00. 15
22:00
ABC Pr 1
Stereo
21:00
–
FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem.
0h35m
Copy Once
DVD Mode
5
1
2
3
Current title number
Elapsed recording time
Timer recording start and stop times
Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is
a timer recording.
35
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
05
CPhlaapteyr b5 ack
Introduction
Using the Disc Navigator to browse
the contents of a disc.
Most of the features described in this chapter make use
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/
ꢅ (cursor buttons) and ENTER. To go back one level
from any screen, use the RETURN button. Remember
also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen
shows which buttons do what.
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc
and start playback.
HDD
DVD
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3
discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some
varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. The following
icons are provided to help you quickly identify which
instructions you need for which kind of disc.
DVD
Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW
DISC NAVIGATOR
DVD-Video
Commercially produced DVD or finalized
Video mode DVD-R/RW
ENTER
HOME
MENU
Video mode
Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized)
VR mode
VR mode DVD-RW
HDD
HDD
CD
Audio CD
Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only
discs
Video CD
Video CD
Super VCD
Super VCD
DVD-Video
CD
Video CD
Super VCD WMA/MP3
WMA/MP3
WMA or MP3 files
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’
from the on-screen display.
MP3
MP3 files
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/
MP3 disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes
you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This
is not a malfunction.
• When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as
making a program list, are not available in PBC
mode. Stop the disc first, then start playback by
pressing ꢎ.
Timer Recording
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
Disc History
PhotoViewer
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The
PhotoViewer on page 90.
DV Record
DVR-520H/720H screen
2
Select what you want to play.
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to highlight items
and ENTER to select.
36
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
05
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc
Navigator looks slightly different.
1
Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or
the DVD drive.
The screen for DVD discs shows the titles on the left and
the chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter
within a title.
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’
from the on-screen display.
Alternatively, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR to go
straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
Disc Navigator
3
Select ‘Play’ from the menu options.
Title (1-10)
Title 01
Title 02
Title 03
Title 04
Title 05
Title 06
Title 07
Title 08
Chapter (1-003)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
DVD
Press ENTER to move to the thumbnails area of the
screen.
Disc Navigator
Video Mode
DVD
1
2
3
6
The screen for CDs and Video CDs shows a list of tracks.
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play
Erase
4
5
Disc Navigator
Ttl Name
Lock
Erase All
Track (1-10)
Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06
Track 07
Track 08
Total Time 0.58.25
CD
Undo
1/1
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select a
title to play.
5
Press ENTER to start playback.
The screen for WMA/MP3 discs shows a list of folders
and tracks. Select a folder or a track within a folder.
Note
Disc Navigator
• It’s not possible to use the Disc Navigator when
playing a Video CD in PBC mode.
Folder (1-03)
01.Rock
02.Pop
Track (1-004)
001.Intro
002.Escape
WMA/MP3
03.Dance
003.Everything You Say
004.What I Do
• Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to
use the time search mode. See Search Mode on
page 40.
Playback starts after you press ENTER.
Changing the thumbnail picture for a title
• For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and
WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area
between CD and WMA/MP3. This can only be done
while the disc is stopped.
VR mode Video mode
HDD
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears for
each title in the Disc Navigator screen using the NAVI
MARK button.
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD
PLAY
VR mode Video mode
HDD
When used with a recordable disc or the HDD, the Disc
Navigator gives you access to all the editing features of
this recorder as well as the ability to browse and play
titles. See also Editing on page 76 for more on editing
recordable discs.
PAUSE
STEP/SLOW
ꢉ
ꢈ
NAVI
MARK
37
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
05
1
Start playback of the title you want to change
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
the thumbnail for.
1
During playback, use the number buttons to
2
Press NAVI MARK anywhere in the title to make
input a track number.
For example, for track 6, press 6; for track 24, press 2,
then 4.
the displayed picture the thumbnail for that title.
• For greater control over the exact frame you want to
use, you can use the ꢌ PAUSE and/or slow-motion/
frame advance/reverse controls (ꢉ /ꢈ).
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new track.
Navigating discs and the HDD
ALL
During playback you can easily jump to another title,
chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on
the remote.
Scanning discs
You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or
backward.
REV SCAN
PLAY
FWD SCAN
CLEAR
ENTER
1
During playback, press ꢊ or ꢋ to start
reverse or forward scanning.
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
2
Press the same button repeatedly to increase the
DVD-Video Video mode
scanning speed.
1
During playback use the number buttons to
DVD
HDD
enter a chapter number within the current title.
For example, for chapter 6, press 6; for chapter 24,
press 2, then 4.
• Forward:
SCAN 1 ꢁ SCAN 2 ꢁ SCAN 3 ꢁ SCAN 4
• Reverse:
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.
Reverse play ꢁ SCAN 1 ꢁ SCAN 2 ꢁ SCAN 3
ꢁ SCAN 4
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new chapter.
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
MP3
VR mode
HDD
• Forward/Reverse:
SCAN 1 ꢁ SCAN 2
1
During playback, use the number buttons to
input a title number.
For example, for title 6, press 6; for title 24, press 2,
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢄ PLAY.
then 4.
Note
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.
• Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be
smooth.
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new title.
• Sound can be heard while scanning audio CDs
(analog output only).
• Scanning is not possible with WMA files.
38
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
05
• No subtitles are displayed while scanning DVD-Video
discs.
Note
• The picture quality during slow motion playback is
not as good as during normal playback and depends
on the disc being played.
• Analog and digital sound is output when scanning
DVDs with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on
forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the
optical digital output.*) No sound is output when
using other scan speeds.
* Except during chase playback and simultaneous
recording/playback.
• Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth
as forward and may be better with some discs than
others.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may
automatically resume when a new chapter is reached
on a DVD disc.
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD,
except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output
from the optical digital output during forward
SCAN 1).
• No sound is output during slow-motion playback.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may
automatically resume when a new chapter is reached
on a DVD disc.
Frame advance/frame reverse
DVD
HDD
Video CD
Super VCD
You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the
HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you
can only use frame advance.
Playing in slow motion
DVD
HDD
Video CD
Super VCD
You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs
and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in
either direction, while Video CD/Super VCDs can only be
played forwards in slow motion.
PLAY
PAUSE
STEP/SLOW
ꢉ
ꢈ
PLAY
1
2
During playback, press ꢌ PAUSE.
STEP/SLOW
ꢉ
ꢈ
Press ꢉ or ꢈ to back up or advance one frame.
• Hold down ꢉ or ꢈ for continuous frame reverse/
frame advance.
1
Press ꢉ or ꢈ to start slow motion reverse or
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢄ PLAY.
forward playback.
2
Press the same button repeatedly to change the
Note
slow motion speed.
• The picture quality when using frame reverse is not
as good as frame advance.
SLOW 1/16
SLOW 1/2
SLOW 1/8
SLOW 1/4
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may
automatically resume when a new chapter is reached
on a DVD disc.
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢄ PLAY.
39
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
05
Search Mode
The Play Mode menu
ALL
ALL
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a
specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/folder/
track number.
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search
functions, repeat and program play functions.
1
2
3
Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode menu.
Select one of the search options.
Important
• You can’t use the Play Mode features with Video CD/
Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD
disc menu is being displayed. For other restrictions,
see the following sections.
Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/
folder/track number or the search time (in hours,
minutes & seconds).
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Input Time
0.01.00
PLAY MODE
Program
CLEAR
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes
into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 45 minutes into
the disc, press 4, 5, 0, 0.
ENTER
PLAY
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6,
press 6. Alternatively, you can use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/
down) buttons.
4
Press ENTER.
1
Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode menu
screen.
Tip
• You can often select what you want to watch on a
DVD disc from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP
MENU to display the disc menu.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Program
Note
• When using time search, playback may occasionally
start slightly before or after the time you input.
• You can also access the Play Mode menu from the
Home Menu (press HOME MENU).
• Time search doesn’t work with Super VCDs.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) and ENTER
A-B Repeat
to navigate.
DVD
CD
Video CD
HDD
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or
PLAY MODE.
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is
played over and over.
Important
• You can’t use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 or Super
VCD discs.
40
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
05
1
During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the
VR mode
Play Mode menu.
• For VR mode DVD discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat
Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off).
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press ENTER at
the point you want the loop to start.
DVD-Video Video mode
HDD
Play Mode
• For HDD, DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs,
select Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat
Off).
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
A (Loop Start)
B (Loop End)
Off
Program
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
• For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Repeat
Disc or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).
After setting the loop start point, the highlight will
automatically move down to B(Loop End).
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press ENTER at
WMA/MP3
the point you want the loop to end.
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and
plays the loop round and round.
• For WMA/MP3 discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat
Folder or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).
• When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from
the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be
in the same title.
3
To resume normal playback, select ‘Repeat Off’
from the Repeat Play menu.
• You can also press CLEAR to cancel repeat play if no
menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is
displayed.
4
To resume normal playback, select ‘Off’ from the
A-B Repeat menu.
• You can also press CLEAR to cancel A-B Repeat play
if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is
displayed.
Note
• If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of
a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.
Note
• If there is a program list, you can also select Repeat
Program to repeat the program list.
• If you switch camera angles while using A-B Repeat
with a DVD-Video disc, A-B repeat is canceled.
Program play
Repeat play
DVD-Video
CD
Video CD
Super VCD WMA/MP3
ALL
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/
chapters/folders/tracks on a disc.
There are various repeat play options, depending on the
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together
with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the
program list (see Program play below).
1
Select ‘Program’ from the Play Mode menu.
2
Select ‘Input/Edit Program’ from the list of
program options.
1
2
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.
Select a repeat play mode.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Input/Edit Program
Start Program Play
Cancel Program Play
Erase Program List
Program
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Repeat Disc
Repeat Title
Repeat Chapter
Repeat Off
Program
The Program edit screen that appears depends on the
kind of disc loaded.
41
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
05
On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a
list of titles (DVD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks (CD,
Video CD/Super VCDs). On the far right is a list of
chapters (DVD) or tracks (WMA/MP3).
4
Repeat step 3 to build up a program list.
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/
folders/tracks.
5
To play the program list, press ꢄ PLAY.
3
Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the
Program play remains active until you turn off program
play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject
the disc or switch off the recorder.
current step in the program list.
For a DVD disc, you can add a whole title, or a chapter
within a title to the program list.
• To add a title, select the title.
Tip
• To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press
• To save your program list and exit the program edit
screen without starting playback, press HOME
MENU or PLAY MODE.
ꢅ (cursor right)and select a chapter from the list.
Program
Step
• You can change the program list by selecting Input/
Edit Program from the Play Mode Program menu.
Title (1-38)
Title 01
Title 02
Title 03
Title 04
Title 05
Title 06
Title 07
Title 08
Chapter (1-004)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
01. 01-003
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
• During program play, press ꢎ to skip to the next
program step.
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program
play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is
displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program
list.
For a CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to
the program list.
Other Program play functions
Program
As well as creating and editing a program list, you can
start program play, cancel program play, and erase the
program list from the Play Mode menu.
Step
01. 04
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Track (1-12)
Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06
Track 07
Track 08
Total Time 0.00.00
1
Press PLAY MODE and select ‘Program’ from the
list of functions on the left.
2
Select a program play function.
• Input/Edit Program – See above
For a WMA/MP3 disc, you can add a whole folder, or a
track within a folder to the program list.
• Start Program Play – Starts playback of a saved
program list
• To add a folder, select the folder.
• Cancel Program Play – Turns off program play, but
does not erase the program list
• To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press ꢅ
(cursor right) and select a track from the list.
• Erase Program List – Erases the program list and
turns off program play
Program
Step
01. 01-003
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Folder (1-06)
01. Pop
02. Electronic
03. Jazz
04. Indie
05. Rock
Track (1-010)
001. Track 01
002. Track 02
003. Track 03
004. Track 04
005. Track 05
006. Track 06
007. Track 07
008. Track 08
Note
• When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters,
chapters not included in the program list may be
sometimes be played, depending on the disc.
06. Classic
• You can use repeat play with program play. Start
playback of the program list then select Program
Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see
Repeat play on page 41).
After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/
track, the step number automatically moves down one.
• To insert a step into the program list, highlight the
step number where you want to insert another step,
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move
down one.
• To delete a step from the program list, highlight the
step you want to delete, then press CLEAR.
42
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
05
Displaying and switching subtitles
Switching DVD soundtracks
DVD-Video
DVD-Video
Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which
subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle
language during playback.
When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more
soundtracks (often in different languages), you can
switch the soundtrack during playback.
Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack
options.
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle
options.
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
•
Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio
soundtrack.
CLEAR
Audio : 1/2
Dolby Digital 2/0CH
1
Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle
option.
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
Subtitle: 1/2 English
Note
• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when
switching soundtracks.
• Some discs only allow you to change audio language
The toucan lives in tropical forests
from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access.
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio
Language on page 105.
2
To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then
CLEAR.
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS
soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when
DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack,
connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/
receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital
output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver on
page 19 for connection details.
Note
• Some discs only allow you to change subtitle
language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to
access.
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on
page 106.
43
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
05
Switching audio channels
Switching camera angles
VR mode
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
DVD-Video
For VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you
can switch between left (L) channel, right (R) channel, or
both (L+R).
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or
more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be
marked with a
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right
channel.
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon
appears on screen to let you know that other angles are
available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see
Angle Indicator on page 111).
Some Super VCD discs have two soundtracks. With
these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks
as well as individual channels in each.
ANGLE
AUDIO
•
To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE.
• The angle number is displayed on-screen.
1
To display/switch the audio channel, press
• If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the
new angle.
AUDIO repeatedly.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-
screen.
• Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while
repeat playback is active.
VR mode
Note
• L+R – Both channels (default)
• L – Left channel only
• You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video
disc menus. Press TOP MENU to access.
• R – Right channel only
CD
Video CD
WMA/MP3
• Stereo – Stereo (default)
• 1/L – Left channel only
• 2/R – Right channel only
Super VCD
• 1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default)
• 1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel
• 1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel
• 2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo
• 2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel
• 2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel
Note
• When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode
disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital
soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch
the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby
Digital ꢁ PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 104)
or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch
the audio channel.
44
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
CRhaepcteor 6rding
• The maximum number of titles that can be recorded
on a DVD-R/RW disc is 99.
About DVD recording
• The maximum number of chapters recordable on a
DVD-R/RW disc is 999.
This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW
media. The main difference between the two is that DVD-
R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW can be
recorded, erased and re-recorded many times.
• No more recording is possible on a disc that already
contains the maximum number of chapters/titles.
A further difference between the two disc types is that
only DVD-RW can be initialized for VR mode recording,
which offers much more comprehensive editing
functions compared to Video mode recording.
About HDD recording
The big advantage, however, of Video mode is its
compatibility with standard DVD players, most of which
will not play VR mode DVD-RW discs (see also the notes
below).
Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is
basically similar to recording to a VR mode DVD-RW disc.
You have the full choice of recording quality options,
including the manual mode, and of course you can
record, erase and re-record as many times as you like.
While DVD-R discs can only be recorded using the Video
mode, you can initialize a DVD-RW disc for Video or VR
mode recordings. Once initialized (any previous content
is erased in this operation), all recordings on that disc
will be in the chosen recording mode.
The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can
store many hours of video on it, even in the higher quality
recording modes. To help you organize the contents, the
HDD is divided into four groups. You can name and use
these groups as you like—for example, you might have a
group for movies, another for TV shows, and one for
camcorder recordings.
Important
• You cannot play, edit or record on unfinalized DVD-R/
RW discs recorded in Video mode on other DVD
recorders. (Likewise, unfinalized Video mode discs
recorded on this recorder are not playable on other
players/recorders.)
Important
• It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on
the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure
that the Input Line System setting (page 98) matches
the TV line system of the source you’re recording.
• This recorder cannot record onto CD-R or CD-RW
discs.
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the
recorder.
Note
• The maximum number of titles that can be recorded
on the HDD is 250.
• Fingerprints and small scratches on a disc can affect
playback and/or recording performance. Please take
proper care of your discs.
• You can record up to 102 hours of video (in EP mode)
on the internal 80GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD) on
the DVR-420H/ 520H, or up to 204 hours on the
160GB DVR-720H.
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also
Input Line System on page 98.
• The maximum number of chapters per title
recordable on the HDD is 99.
• No more recording is possible on the HDD after the
maximum number of titles has been reached.
Note
• The maximum continuous recording time is six
hours.
• Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models,
are compatible with VR mode DVD-RW discs. Check
the operating instructions for your player for VR
mode compatibility information.
45
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
Recording time and picture quality
Restrictions on video recording
There are four preset recording quality modes:
• You cannot record copy-protected video using this
recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video
discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-
protected material is encountered during a
• FINE – Highest quality setting, gives about one hour
of recording time on a DVD disc.
• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, sufficient for
most applications, gives about two hours of
recording time on a DVD.
recording, recording will pause automatically and an
error message will be displayed on-screen.
• Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded on
the HDD or a DVD-RW disc in VR mode (see below).
• LP (Long Play) – Slightly lower video quality, but
doubles the recording time on a DVD to around four
hours.
• When recording a TV broadcast or through an
external input, you can display copy control
information on screen. (see Displaying disc
information on-screen on page 33).
• EP (Extended Play) – Use when maximum recording
time is most important; EP gives you around six
hours of recording time on a DVD disc.
In addition to these settings, you can access 32 different
recording quality/time settings when manual recording
mode is on (see Manual Recording on page 107), giving
you precise control over the recording.
CPRM
CPRM is a copy protection system with scramble system
regarding the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast
programs. CPRM stands for Content Protection for
Recordable Media.
When setting a timer recording there is a further option,
AUTO, which maximizes the recording quality for the
space available on the disc loaded at the time of
recording. (If recording to the HDD, the recording quality
is maximized to fit on to a DVD disc.)
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that
you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you
cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD-
RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode or on
the HDD.
In all except the FINE/MN32 modes, sound is recorded in
two channel Dolby Digital format. When set to FINE/
MN32, sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed
Linear PCM format.
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that
are specifically compatible with CPRM.
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording
in Video mode or to the HDD, or in VR mode on the FINE/
MN32 setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting
(page 104) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to
record before recording starts.
Recording equipment and copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also
Input Line System on page 98.
• This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of
certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
Note
• Note that all recording times (both here and those
shown by the recorder) are only approximate. This is
because of the way that the video is recorded; you
may get slightly more or slightly less, depending on
what you’re recording.
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
46
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
Setting the picture quality/recording
time
Basic recording from the TV
VR mode Video mode
HDD
VR mode Video mode
HDD
Follow the instructions below to record a TV program.
Recording starts immediately and continues until the
disc is full or you stop the recording.
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set
the picture quality/recording time. There are four
standard settings available, which allow you to choose a
balance between picture quality and recording time.
It’s also possible to create a fifth, ‘manual’ setting for
picture quality/recording time. Before you can select this,
however, you will need to set the Manual Recording
option in the Initial Settings menu (see Manual Recording
on page 107).
HDD
DVD
AUDIO
REC MODE
CHANNEL
ENTER
•
Press REC MODE repeatedly to select a recording
setting.
• FINE – Fine picture quality
• SP – Standard play
• LP – Long play
PAUSE
• EP – Extended play
REC
STOP REC REC MODE
• MN – Manual (available only when manual recording
is on)
ì
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting
(see On Screen Display on page 98) is Off then this
information is not displayed.)
DVD RECORDER
1
Press HDD or DVD to record to the hard disk drive
or a recordable DVD respectively.
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if
you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder
takes a short while to initialize the disc).
2
Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV
channel to record.
The front panel display shows the channel number:
23 30
PR 7
Channel preset
• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the
number buttons on the remote to select the channel.
(For channel 6, press 6 then ENTER; for channel 24,
press 2, 4 then ENTER)
47
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the +/–
buttons on the front panel to select the channel
number.
Direct recording from TV
If you connected this recorder to your TV using a SCART
cable, and your TV supports Direct Recording, you can
record whatever is currently being shown on the TV
without having to worry about what channel preset the
recorder is on. Check the instructions that came with
your TV if you’re not sure whether your TV supports this
feature.
3
Use the REC MODE button to set the picture
quality/recording time.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time above
for detailed instructions.
4
Use the AUDIO button to select the audio
channel to record.
See Changing audio channels on page 29 for more on
PAUSE
this.
• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The
only exception to this is when the picture quality is set
to FINE/MN32, in which case you do need to select
the audio channel before recording.
REC
STOP REC REC MODE
ì
TV DIRECT
REC
5
Press ì REC to start recording.
If you want to set a recording end time, press the ì REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the
front panel display. When the recording ends, the
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other
operation is being performed.
1
2
If necessary, load a recordable disc.
Set the picture quality/recording time using the
REC MODE button.
3
Press TV DIRECT REC to start recording.
If you want to set a recording time, press the ì REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. You
can see the recording time on-screen and in the front
panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder
automatically switches into standby if no other operation
is being performed.
• To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press
ꢌ PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If
recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter
is started after recording restarts)
• To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.
6
To stop the recording, press ꢀ STOP REC.
• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing ꢀ
STOP REC.
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press
ꢌ PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If
recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter
is started after recording restarts)
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after six hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
4
To stop the recording, press ꢀ STOP REC.
• If you set the recording time in step 3, you can still
stop the recording anytime by pressing ꢀ STOP REC.
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after six hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
Tip
• During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop
through function. During recording, press the front
panel + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop
through on), or – to switch to SCART NORM (loop
though off). Note that you can’t switch loop through
on if recording from the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER)
or AV1(RGB)-TV connectors. Also, loop through is
automatically reset to off after recording has
finished.
Tip
• You can press TV DIRECT REC while the recorder is
in standby to switch on and immediately start
recording.
• Please note that you can’t record from another
component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART
cable to the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector
using the TV Direct Recording feature.
48
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
Important
Setting a timer recording
• A timer recording can’t be set if:
– Auto Start Recording is in progress.
– There are already 32 timer programs waiting to be
recorded.
VR mode Video mode
HDD
Using the timer recording features you can program up
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer
recording programs can be set to record just once, every
day, or every week.
• Timer recording will not start if:
– The recorder is already recording.
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.
You can set the recording quality for your timer recording
in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the
added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the
recording quality for the space available on the disc (if
recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if
recording to HDD).
• Timer recording will start when the operation
preventing timer recording has finished.
• If a recordable DVD that doesn’t support
simultaneous playback and recording (see
Simultaneous recording and playback on page 55) is
playing when a DVD timer recording is due to start,
playback will automatically stop to allow the
recording to start.
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly)
HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to
automatically replace the previous timer recording with
the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the
previous recording made on that timer program will be
replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have
watched it yet or not.
• The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel
display when the timer is active. If the indicator is
blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording)
there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not
recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that
the HDD is not recordable).
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc
if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set
(see Optimized Rec on page 108 for more on this).
• Timer recordings have higher priority than the Auto
Start Recording function (see Automatic recording
from a satellite tuner on page 56). A timer recording
will interrupt an Auto Start Recording. (Auto Start
Recording will resume after the timer recording has
finished.)
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will
• Approximately two minutes before a timer recording
is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording
standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use
some functions.
automatically record the program to the HDD for you.
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video
Programming System) and PDC (Program Delivery
Control) systems used by many TV stations to ensure that
a timer recording catches the whole program even when
the program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer
programs can be set with VPS/PDC on.
• The maximum length for timer recordings made to
the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title is
limited to six hours, recordings over six hours will be
spread over two or more titles. Note that there will be
a break in the recording of a few seconds between
titles.
• VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in
your country/area. Check with the stations for
compatibility.
49
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
• DVD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets
the best recording quality for the space available on
the disc loaded at the time of recording.
Easy Timer Recording
As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes
setting up a timer recording as simple as possible.
• HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets
the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank
DVD disc.
• Press DVD to record to DVD disc, or HDD if you want
to record to the hard disk drive.
HDD
DVD
3
Use ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to move the
cursor to the recording start date and time on the
grid.
• You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at
a time using the ꢊ and ꢋ buttons.
CHANNEL
Current time
Recording start time
Easy Timer Recording
ENTER
HOME
MENU
8:00
9:00
10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00
RETURN
13/12
14/12
15/12
MON
13/12 11:45 --:--
+
–
CHANNEL
Pr 7
FINE
HDD
/
REC MODE
HDD/DVD
REC MODE
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer
recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is
a 15 minute interval.
ì
ꢏ
EASY
TIMER
The darker area represents time that has already passed
and can’t therefore be selected. The lighter area is time
that’s available.
4
Press ENTER to set the start time.
DVD RECORDER
The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the
screen.
• You can go back and reset the start time if you need
1
Press EASY TIMER.
to by pressing RETURN.
Alternatively, you can also access from the Home Menu
(press HOME MENU and select Timer Recording then
Easy Timer Recording).
5
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) to move the
cursor to the recording end time on the grid.
Easy Timer Recording
Recording start time
Recording end time
8:00
9:00
10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00
13/12
14/12
15/12
Easy Timer Recording
11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00
13/12
14/12
15/12
MON
13/12
9:30 --:--
+
–
CHANNEL
REC MODE
HDD/DVD
/
Pr 7
FINE
HDD
MON
–
13/12 11:45
13:45
2
Set the TV channel and recording quality.
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to set the channel you
want to record.
+
CHANNEL
/
Pr 7
REC MODE FINE
HDD/DVD
HDD
As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow
stretches from the start time to the current cursor
position, representing the length of the recording. A
recording of up to six hours can be set.
• Use the REC MODE button to set the recording
quality. Press repeatedly to switch between FINE, SP,
LP, EP and AUTO (and MN if manual recording mode
is on).
50
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
6
7
Press ENTER to set the end time.
• The amount of free space available on the HDD and
the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown
towards the bottom of the screen.
Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer recording and exit, or
‘No’ to go back to the timer recording screen.
• You can check the timer recording details you just set
from the main timer recording screen (see Standard
timer recording below).
• In the lower-right corner, the number of timer
programs already set and the number that use VPS/
PDC, is shown next to Tmr Pgms.
• If there are more than eight timer programs already
set, press NEXT ꢎ to switch page (go back using
the PREV ꢍ button).
Note
• You can’t use VPS/PDC with Easy Timer Recording.
Use the standard or VIDEO Plus+ timer recording
methods if you want to use VPS/PDC.
• You can also clear a timer program before it’s started
(before the recorder enters timer recording standby)
by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR.
2
Select ‘New Input’ to set a new timer program,
Standard timer recording
then press ENTER.
The timer recording screen you can see all the timer
programs already set, clear programs and set up new
ones.
Timer Recording
Date
Start
10
Stop
--
CH
Pr 7
Rec Mode
SP
12/12 SUN
00
--
CLEAR
Rec to
HDD
Group
VPS/PDC
OFF
GROUP 1
Program Set
Ttl Name Input
ENTER
HOME
MENU
3
Enter the timer recording settings.
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select a field;
use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to change the
value.
PREV
NEXT
• Date – Choose a date up to one month in advance, or
select a daily or weekly program.
TIMER REC
ì
ꢏ
• Start – Set the recording start time.
• Stop – Set the recording end time (maximum length
of a timer recording is 24 hours for HDD recording or
six hours for DVD).
1
Press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording
screen.
• CH – Choose a channel (1–99, excluding skip
channels), or one of the external inputs from which to
record.
You can also access the Timer Recording screen from
the Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Timer
Recording, then Timer Recording (View)).
• Mode – Select FINE, SP, LP, EP or AUTO (See
Recording time and picture quality on page 46). If
Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the
MN setting.
This screen shows all the timer programs currently set.
Timer Recording
Date
MON 13/12
EVERY TUE
Start
7:00
:00
Stop
8:00
10:00
New Input
CH
Pr
Pr
Mode Rec to VPS/PDC
3
5
FINE HDD
FINE HDD
Off
On
• Rec to – Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD
9
for DVD recording. Select HDD
for Auto Replace
Recording (daily or weekly timer recording only).
• Group – Select a record group (for HDD recording
only).
HDD Remain
DVD Remain
10h20m(FINE)
0h43m(FINE)
1/1
• VPS/PDC – The VPS/PDC system automatically
adjusts the recording time so that even if a program
is not running to schedule you won’t miss it. For VPS/
PDC to work properly, you must input the correct
announced time and date of the program you want to
record. Up to eight timer recordings can be set with
• Each row is for one timer recording program, with the
date and time information, channel, recording mode,
DVD or HDD and the VPS/PDC setting.
51
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
®
VPS/PDC on.
Timer recording using the VIDEO Plus+
programming system
Note that VPS/PDC may not work with every station
and that Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/
PDC is on.
This system makes programming timer recordings very
simple. Most TV guides publish PlusCode programming
numbers with their program details. If you want to make
a timer recording of a program, you just input the
corresponding code. The date, start, stop and channel
settings are made automatically. All you have to do is tell
the recorder the recording mode, and whether it’s a
once-only recording or a regular recording.
• Ttl Name Input – Optionally, you can enter a name
for the recording up to 32 characters. (Highlight
Program Set then press ꢃ (cursor down) to access
this option.)
4
After entering all the timer recording
information, highlight ‘Program set’ and press
ENTER.
The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The
timer program you just input appears in the list. The
rightmost column shows various timer recording status
messages:
HDD
DVD
• Standby is displayed when the recorder is in timer
recording standby.
• Recording is displayed when a timer recording is in
progress.
5
To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME
VIDEO Plus+
MENU.
CLEAR
Note
ENTER
• For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see
Optimized Rec on page 108) is set to On (and VPS/
PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the recording
quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the
recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1
recording quality then the Recovery Recording
feature will automatically make the recording to the
HDD instead.
HOME
MENU
REC MODE
ì
ꢏ
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an
Auto Replace Recording may not complete
successfully.
1
Press ‘VIDEO Plus+’ to display the VIDEO Plus+
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed
copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to
start, the new timer recording will not replace the old
one. However, the next time the timer recording
starts, both of the older two programs will be erased.
program screen.
You can also access this screen from the Home Menu
(press HOME MENU, select Timer Recording, then
VIDEO Plus+).
• If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you
must switch the recorder into standby before the
timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly.
For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need
to switch the recorder into standby.
VIDEO Plus+
0
9
PlusCode#
Rec Mode
Rec Times
3 9 9 2 4
to input
REC MODE
to change
MN21
to change level
Once
Daily
Weekly
to change
HDD
Off
HDD DVD to change
Rec to
Tip
ꢍ
ꢎ
to change
VPS/PDC
• Stations that use VPS/PDC typically include VPS/
PDC information in the teletext TV guide pages.
Please refer to these when setting your timer
recording.
• Use the number buttons to enter the PlusCode
programming number. (To clear the last digit
entered, press CLEAR.)
52
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
• Press REC MODE to select FINE, SP, LP, EP or AUTO
(See Recording time and picture quality on page 46). If
Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the
MN setting.
Important
• You can’t use this feature until you have set up the
guide channels. See Set VIDEO Plus+ CH on
page 101.
• Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select the
Once, Daily or Weekly recording option.
• You can’t change the recording mode.
• Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to
record to a DVD.
• You can’t program daily or weekly timer recordings.
1
Press ’VIDEO Plus+’.
• Use the ꢍand ꢎbuttons to switch VPS/PDC On
or Off.
The front panel display shows the current recording
mode and prompts you to enter the PlusCode
programming number.
2
After making the settings, press ENTER.
The program details are shown at the bottom of the
screen for a few seconds then the screen is automatically
exited.
P LUS CODE
2
Use the number buttons to enter the PlusCode
• If you haven’t set up the guide channels (or at least
the guide channel for the PlusCode programming
number that you entered), the recorder will prompt
you to enter the channel number that the TV program
is showing on.
programming number.
2 9 32 4
• To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR.
• Use the PREV ꢍ / NEXT ꢎ button to switch VPS/
PDC on/off. With VPS/PDC on, the front panel VPS/
PDC indicator lights. (Note that a maximum of 8
timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC on.)
Tip
• You can check the timer program settings by
pressing TIMER REC to display the timer recording
screen.
3
Press ENTER.
The display shows the timer settings:
Date ꢁ Start time ꢁ End time ꢁ HDD and Recording
channel.
VIDEO Plus+ programming with the power
off
You can enter a PlusCode programming number when
the recorder is in standby. Note that the recording is
always made to the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD
disc, you’ll need to switch on the power and use the full
VIDEO Plus+ program screen.
• If CODE ERROR appears in the display, check that
the PlusCode programming number is correct and
that the guide channel is set (see Set VIDEO Plus+
CH on page 101), then set the timer recording again.
• If CAN’T SET appears in the display, it means that
although you entered a valid PlusCode programming
number, the program has already finished.
VIDEO Plus+
CLEAR
ENTER
PREV
NEXT
ì
ꢏ
53
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
2
Use the ꢂ (cursor up) button to highlight the
Extending a timer recording in progress
You can extend a timer recording beyond the
programmed end time in two different ways. This can be
useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example.
current timer recording (‘Recording’ is shown in the
‘VPS/PDC’ column), then press ENTER.
A screen showing details of the timer recording appears.
From this screen, only the recording stop time can be
changed.
CLEAR
Timer Recording
ENTER
Date
13/12 SAT
Start
7
Stop
8
CH
Rec Mode
FINE
HOME
MENU
00
00
Pr 3
Rec to
HDD
Group
GROUP1
VPS/PDC
OFF
Program Set
Ttl Name Input
PREV
REC
NEXT
STOP REC
TIMER REC
3
Set a new Stop time for the timer recording.
ì
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select the
hour or minute field, then use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down)
buttons to change the time.
Moving the end time by 30-minute blocks
During timer recording, press and hold ì REC for
three seconds.
The timer indicator disappears from the front panel
4
Press ENTER to set the new time and exit the
screen.
1
Recording will continue until the new stop time is
reached.
display.
Canceling and stopping a timer recording in
progress
2
Press ì REC repeatedly to extend recording in 30
minute increments.
After a timer recording has started, you can cancel the
program (but continue recording), or stop recording
completely if you need to.
Programming a new end time
Note that it is only possible to program a new end time for
a timer recording when VPS/PDC is off.
1
During timer recording, press TIMER REC to
display the Timer Recording screen.
REC
STOP REC
ì
You can also access the Timer Recording screen from
the Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Timer
Recording, then Timer Recording (View)).
Timer Recording
1
During timer recording, press and hold ì REC for
Date
Start
Stop
CH
Pr 3 FINE HDD
Pr 5 FINE HDD
Mode Rec to VPS/PDC
three seconds.
12/13 MON
EVERY TUE
7:00
9:00
8:00
10:00
New Input
Recording
On
Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator
disappears); recording continues so that you can
manually stop recording whenever you like.
2
When you want to stop recording completely,
press ꢀ STOP REC.
HDD Remain
DVD Remain
--h--m(FINE)
0h43m(FINE)
1/1
54
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
Preventing use of the recorder before a
timer recording (child lock)
Simultaneous recording and
playback
You can make all the front panel and remote control
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make
sure that the timer settings are not changed before
recording has finished.
VR mode
HDD
A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a
recording in progress (DVD or HDD) from the start of the
recording (as in, playback is ‘chasing’ the recording). For
example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30 minutes of
a movie on TV; you can start recording, then start
watching the movie, from the beginning, while the
recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you.
1
If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.
2
Press and hold ꢅ STOP on the front panel for
three seconds to lock the controls.
The front panel display briefly shows LOCK. If any buttons
are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly
displayed again.
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording
in progress; you can watch anything else already on the
DVD or HDD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator
screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD on page 37).
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold ꢅ STOP on
the front panel for three seconds until the display
shows UNLOCK.
• To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is
locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then
press and hold ì REC for three seconds.
Important
• Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or
Ver. 1.2 / 4x disc to be able to use this feature.
• You may not be able to use this feature with a
DVD-RW disc that was first initialized on another
recorder.
Timer recording FAQ
•
During recording, press ꢄ PLAY to start playback
Frequently Asked Questions
from the beginning of the current recording, or press
DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to play
from there.
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start
recording!
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as
pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not
locked (see Lock Disc on page 92), and that there are
fewer than 99/250 titles already on the DVD/HDD.
• To stop playback, press ꢅ STOP (recording will
continue).
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer program! Why
not?
• To stop recording, press ꢀ STOP REC (playback will
continue).
You can’t enter a timer program if the clock isn’t set.
Note
• What happens when two or more timer programs
overlap?
• You can’t start playback immediately after recording
starts.
Basically, the program with the earlier recording start
time has priority. However, the recorder will start
recording the program with the later start time after
the earlier program is finished. If two programs have
the same times (but different channels, for example),
the program set most recently takes priority.
• When scanning a DVD, no sound is output if the
recorder is also recording the DVD (see Scanning
discs on page 38).
• You can’t use this feature during Auto Start
Recording, or in Auto Start Recording standby (the
AUTO indicator is lit in the front panel display).
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are
programmed to start at the same time, then the
program that actually starts first takes priority.
• You can’t use simultaneous playback and recording
while copying or backing up.
• During recording or in timer recording standby, you
can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD
disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also
55
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
Input Line System on page 98). Also, during
simultaneous recording and playback, if the TV line
system of the playback track/title changes then
playback will automatically stop.
Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio,
Bilingual Recording and DV Input are as you want them
(see Audio In settings on page 103).
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or
stretched), adjust on the source component or your
TV before recording.
3
Set up the recorder.
Recording from an external
component
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47
for detailed information.
VR mode Video mode
HDD
• Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to
record to a DVD.
You can record from an external component, such as a
camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s
external inputs.
4
Press ì REC when you’re ready to start
recording.
• DVR-520H/720H only: The recorder will only start
recording from the DV IN/OUT jack if there is a valid
signal. Recording will also pause if the signal is
interrupted during recording.
ꢃ
HDD
DVD
Note
• If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard,
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on
video recording on page 46 for more details.
INPUT
SELECT
CLEAR
Automatic recording from a satellite
ENTER
tuner
HDD
If you have a satellite tuner or some other kind of set top
box connected to the AV2/L1 input, you can have the
recorder start and stop recording automatically with the
timer settings of the connected component. (If the other
component doesn’t have a built-in timer, you’ll need to
use it with an external timer unit.)
ꢉ
REC MODE
ꢈ
REC
ì
ꢏ
After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this recorder
starts recording when it detects a signal from the other
component. When the signal ceases, the recorder stops
recording.
1
Make sure that the component you want to
record from is connected properly to the DVD
recorder.
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options.
Important
• It takes a little while for this recorder to switch on and
start recording after detecting a signal. Please bear
this in mind when setting the timer.
2
Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select one of
the external inputs to record from.
There are two analog inputs and a DV digital input (DVR-
520H/720H only). The current input is shown on-screen
and in the front panel display:
• If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not start if
another timer recording is in progress.
• Timer recordings take precedence over Auto Start
Recording. Auto Start Recording will stop if a timer
recording is due to start. After the timer recording
has finished, Auto Start Recording will resume.
• AV2/L1 – Input 1/Auto Start Rec
• L2 – Input 2 (front panel)
• DV – DV input/output (front panel) (DVR-520H/720H
only)
56
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
1
Set the timer for the satellite receiver (or other
component), then switch it into standby (if
necessary).
Recording from a DV camcorder
(DVR-520H/720H only)
Check the manual that came with the receiver if you’re
not sure how to do this.
VR mode Video mode
HDD
2
Check that the ‘Audio In’ settings for ‘External
You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the
DV IN/OUT jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using
the recorder’s remote, you can control both the
camcorder and this recorder.
Audio’ and ‘Bilingual Recording’ are as you want
them.
See Audio In settings on page 103 for more on these
settings.
Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the
DV IN/OUT jack is setup (see DV Input (DVR-520H/720H
only) on page 104).
3
Set up the recorder.
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47
for detailed information.
4
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Timer Recording’,
ꢃ
then ‘Auto Start Recording’.
HDD
DVD
5
Select ‘Yes’ to switch Auto Start Recording on, or
‘No’ to switch off.
6
Switch the recorder into standby.
The AUTO indicator in the front panel display lights.
The recorder will automatically switch on and start
recording when the other component comes on.
Recording stops when the external component switches
off.
CLEAR
• To cancel Auto Start Recording, press ꢃ STANDBY/
ON while the recorder is in standby. The AUTO
indicator goes off.
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
• To cancel Auto Start Recording once recording has
already started, press ì REC for three seconds, then
ꢀ STOP REC.
REV SCAN
PAUSE
PLAY
FWD SCAN
STOP
• When a timer recording is in progress ahead of Auto
Start Recording, some functions, such as extending
the timer recording and chase play, are not available.
Press the front panel + button for three seconds to
cancel Auto Start Recording without affecting the
timer recording. The AUTO indicator goes off.
STEP/SLOW
ꢉ
REC MODE
ꢈ
ì
ꢏ
Note
Important
• Auto Start Recordings are always on the HDD. Auto
Start Recording to DVD is not possible.
• The source signal must be DVC-SD format
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this
recorder’s remote.
• You can’t set Auto Start Recording when:
• the recorder is recording or in timer recording
standby.
• If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,
you cannot control the second unit from this one.
• the HDD is not recordable.
• You can’t control this unit remotely from a
• the HDD already contains the maximum number
of titles (250).
component connected to the DV IN/OUT jack.
• You can’t record date and time information from DV
cassette.
• AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on
page 102).
57
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is
more than 10 seconds of blank tape, the recorder will
stop recording and the camcorder should stop
(depending on the camcorder).
• Recording is automatically paused if the recorder
detects no signal, or a copy-protected signal.
Recording restarts when there is a non-copy-
protected signal.
• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting
Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display.
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote
control during recording.
• For best results when recording from a DV
camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing
the camcorder to the place you want to start
recording from and setting the camcorder to play-
pause.
• If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not
be recorded. Use the pause button on your
camcorder instead and recording will start
immediately.
1
Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to
the front panel DV IN/OUT jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
• HDD and DVD-RW (VR Mode) only: A chapter marker
is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode
on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is
stopped or paused then restarted, for example.
2
Set up the recorder.
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47
for detailed information.
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording
screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button.
• Make sure a recordable disc is loaded if you want to
record to DVD.
Note
• Depending on the connected camcorder, you may
not be able to control it using the remote control
supplied with this recorder.
3
From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you require.
See DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104 for more
on this.
• If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read
correctly, the audio type will not switch
automatically. You can switch the audio manually
from the External Audio setting (page 103).
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want
them (see Audio In settings on page 103).
• See also DV-related messages on page 117 if you
encounter an error while using the DV IN/OUT jack.
4
Press HOME MENU and select ‘DV Record’ from
the menu.
• DV recording only works when the digital camcorder
is in VTR mode with a tape loaded.
Frequently Asked Questions
5
Select ‘Record to HDD’ or ‘Record to DVD’ to
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!
record to the hard disk drive or a recordable DVD
respectively.
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not
copy-protected.
6
Find the place on the camcorder tape that you
want to start recording from.
For best results, pause playback at the point from which
you want to record.
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder
then switch back on.
• There’s a picture, but no sound!
• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the
ꢅ , ꢄ , ꢌ , ꢊ , ꢋ , ꢉ and ꢈ buttons.
Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input
(DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104) between Stereo
1 and Stereo 2.
7
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
‘Start Rec’ and press ENTER.
ꢅ Stop
ꢅ Stop
1.02.22
Control with these
buttons
Start Rec
Pause Rec
Stop Rec
HDD SP (2h00m/DVD)
Remain
1h40m
58
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
Important
Recording from the DV output
(DVR-520H/720H only)
• Once you’ve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode,
you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc.
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe
‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 93 for how to do
this.
VR mode Video mode
HDD
You can record non-copy-protected material from the
hard disk drive or from a DVD to a camcorder connected
to the DV IN/OUT jack.
• A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on
this recorder even after finalizing.
1
Connect the camcorder to the DV IN/OUT jack of
1
Load the disc you want to finalize.
this recorder.
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before
proceeding.
2
3
4
5
Select the HDD or DVD for playback.
2
3
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
Select ‘Finalize’.
Find the place you want to start recording from.
Start recording on the camcorder.
Play the source material.
Disc Setup
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Finalize
Undo Finalize
Next Screen
Start
Playing your recordings on other DVD
players
VR mode Video mode
4
Select ‘Finalize’ from the finalize options, then
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs
recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including
many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs
recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Check the manual
that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it
will play.
‘Next Screen’.
5
For Video mode discs only, select a title menu
style, then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to
cancel.
The menu you select will be the one that appears when
the ‘top menu’ is selected on any DVD player.
When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is
created from which you can select titles when you play
the disc. There are a number of different styles of title
menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc.
Finalize
TITLE MENU
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,
pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then
using the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) followed by
ENTER to select titles and start playback.
Finalizing a disc
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer
DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature.
These discs will have only a text title menu when
finalized on this recorder.
VR mode Video mode
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
6
The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.
During finalization:
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc
Name on page 92 before starting the steps below.
• If the finalization process is going to take more than
around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel.
Around four minutes before completion, the option to
cancel disappears.
59
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
06
• How long finalization takes depends on the type of
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. A disc
recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes.
Note
• By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW
discs for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init.
on page 108 if you want to change the default to
Video mode.
• If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD
recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or
initialize it for Video mode recording.
Note
• If the TV line system of the disc is different to the
current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to
finalize the disc. See Input Line System on page 98 for
how to change the recorder’s setting.
Initializing a DVD-RW disc
DVD-RW
When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will
initialize it automatically for recording. You can also
manually initialize DVD-RW discs.
You can initialize a disc for either Video mode recording
or VR mode recording.
Important
• Initializing a disc will erase everything recorded on it.
Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want
to keep!
• You may not be able to re-initialize a disc in a different
format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD
recorder.
1
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
Select ‘Initialize’.
Disc Setup
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
VR Mode
Video Mode
Start
Start
3
Select ‘Video Mode’ or ‘VR Mode’ from the
initialize options.
4
Select ‘Start’.
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc.
Initializing Disc
Pr 1
1 min left
60
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
CChaoptpery7 ing and back-up
that copying can be carried out at the maximum speed
possible.
Introduction
When copying from HDD to DVD, the speed of copying
depends on the recording mode and the kind of DVD disc
you’re using. The table at the bottom of the page shows
the minimum copying time for one hour of material.
Use the copying features of this recorder to:
• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to
a DVD
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play
in another player.
Note
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.
• Not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying.
Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility.
The simplest method of copying is to use the One Touch
Copy feature. Using this you can simply copy the title
that’s currently playing from HDD to DVD, or the other
way around.
• There may be cases where even 2x/4x/8x compatible
discs do not copy at full speed.
• High-speed copying is not possible when using discs
initialized on another recorder.
For more complicated copying tasks you can make a
Copy List which specifies precisely what needs to be
copied. A Copy List is similar to a VR mode Play List in
many ways, and you’ll find that the Copy List commands
are similar to those available for editing a Play List.
• The table below shows disc brands that have been
tested for 8x speed writing compatibility with this
recorder.
Maker
A message showing that copying has finished is
displayed after copying. If the recorder is inactive and no
button is pressed (remote or front panel) then the
recorder will automatically go into standby after 20
minutes.
Sony
That’s
JVC
Fujifilm
TDK
Maxell
Verbatim
Ritek
High-speed copying
Copying between DVD and HDD is a completely digital
process and therefore involves no loss of quality in the
audio or video. This means that you can transfer back
and forth without having to worry about the quality
getting worse with each copy ‘generation’. It also means
(As of April, 2004)
DVD disc type
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4x*3
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/8x*4
DVD-R Ver. 2.0
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1/2x*2 DVD-RW Ver. 1.2/4x*3
Rec mode
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1*1
EP
10 mins.
5 mins.
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
2.5 mins.
4 mins.
1.25 mins.
2 mins.
4 mins.
8 mins.
LP
15 mins.
30 mins.
60 mins.
SP
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
FINE
Note that all times in the above table are approximate.
*1 Compatible with single speed recording only
*2 Compatible with 2x speed recording
*3 Compatible with 4x speed recording
*4 Compatible with 8x speed recording. Note that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded.
61
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
Real-time copying
Real-time copying is also possible, with the advantage
that you can manually set a different recording mode
from the original. For example, you can record a title
originally recorded in FINE mode in SP mode.
One Touch Copy* (HDD to DVD)
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing
title (or currently selected title in the Disc Navigator) from
the HDD to DVD. The whole title is copied, regardless of
where in the title you start copying. The recorder copies
at the maximum speed possible.
When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode
DVD, the chapter markers in the original material are not
copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter (Video) setting
(see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 108).
For One Touch Copy to work, make sure that a recordable
DVD-R/RW disc is loaded.
* See also Copyright above.
Frame accuracy and copying
The Frame Accurate setting (see Frame Accurate on
page 108) does not affect the actual video content on the
HDD, but it does affect what can be copied and whether
high-speed copying can be used.
ONE TOUCH
COPY
ꢃ
HDD
DVD
When Frame Accurate is set to Off, high-speed copying
can generally be used to copy titles in the Copy List using
a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc in VR or Video mode. However,
copy-once protected material (see Restrictions on
copying below) can’t be added to the Copy List, and the
divide points in edited titles may be out by as much as 0.5
seconds when compared to the original.
•
During HDD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to
copy the current title to DVD.
The front panel display indicates that the title is being
copied. Playback continues while copying.
When Frame Accurate is On, you can add copy-once
protected titles to the Copy List and divide points in
edited titles are maintained accurately. However,
depending on the content of the Copy List and the disc, it
may not be possible to use high-speed copying.
Note
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail
picture markers (Navimark) for the Disc Navigator,
are also copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode
DVD-R/RW, only the first 32 characters of a name are
copied.
Restrictions on copying
• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly
the same positions as the original when recording on
to a Video mode disc.
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to use a VR mode
DVD-RW disc compatible with CPRM Ver. 1.1 or higher
(see CPRM on page 46 for more on this). Only one
instance of a copy-once protected title can be added to
the Copy List, and after it’s been copied, the title is erased
from the HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a
locked title that is copy-once protected).
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a
title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be
copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-
RW disc for this type of material.
• Low resolution (EP or LP, or MN1–18) widescreen
material can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a
VR mode DVD-RW disc for this type of material.
You can identify copy-once protected material during
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
( ! ) is shown (see Play display 2 on page 35).
One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD)
Copyright
One Touch Copy from DVD to HDD copies a single title to
the HDD in real time. You can copy the currently playing
title or the currently selected title in the Disc Navigator.
When you start copying, playback jumps back to the start
of the title, then continues through to the end of the title,
when recording automatically stops. The copy will be
made in the recording mode (FINE, SP, etc.) that is
currently set.
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
* See also Copyright above.
62
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
• Thumbnail picture markers (Navimark) and chapter
markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their
position in the copy may be slightly changed from the
original.
ONE TOUCH
COPY
ꢃ
• If some part of the title being copied is copy-
protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected
portions will not be copied.
HDD
DVD
•
During DVD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to
Canceling One Touch Copy
copy the current title to HDD.
Playback starts again from the beginning of the current
title. The front panel display and an on-screen display
indicate that the title is being copied.
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.
•
Press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than
a second.
Copying is canceled and the video already copied is
erased.
Note
• The maximum title length for copying is six hours.
• Title name and chapter markers are also copied,
except when copying from a finalized Video mode
disc.
Note
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R copy, the space
available for recording does not return to the pre-
copy figure.
Copying from HDD to DVD*
Currently selected HDD title
Title that cannot be
added to Copy List
HDD to DVD Copy
HDD Groups
All
HDD
1
2
3
4
Titles in the selected
HDD Group
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
16:00 Sun 8/11
Recording Time
Pr 5 LP
0h32m55s
Information for the
selected title
Copy List
menu options
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
1
2
3
4
Copy List titles
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Running time of the
Copy List
Conf List
From the HDD to DVD Copy screen you can build up a
Copy List of titles to copy to DVD. From this screen you
can also edit chapters so that the titles appear as you
want them on your finished DVD.
Important
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
• The Copy List is erased if the Frame Accurate setting
is changed in the Initial Settings menu (see Frame
Accurate on page 108), or if the Input Line System
setting is changed (see Input Line System on
page 98).
* See also Copyright on page 62.
63
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 112) will also erase the
Copy List.
• When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the
PREV (ꢍ) and NEXT (ꢎ) buttons to display the
previous/next page if there are more titles/chapters
than will fit on the screen.
• As you highlight different thumbnails, information
about the title/chapter is shown in the central area of
the screen. Press DISPLAY to change the
information displayed.
• Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left from the thumbnail area of the Copy List
screen.
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
• When selecting HDD titles, you can display titles
from a particular HDD group by pressing ꢂ (cursor
up), then using the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons
and ENTER to select a group. Press ꢃ (cursor down)
to get back to the HDD title thumbnail area.
PREV
NEXT
DVD Copy
All
DISPLAY
1
Make sure that there’s a recordable DVD disc
loaded.
HDD to DVD Copy List menu options
2 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.
Use the following commands when making an HDD to
DVD Copy List:
• Add – Add titles from the HDD to the Copy List (see
page 65).
Timer Recording
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
page 66).
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title in
the Copy List (see page 66).
Disc History
PhotoViewer
DV Record
• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see
page 66).
DVR-520H/720H screen
• Combine – Combine two adjacent titles in the Copy
List into one (see page 67).
3
Select ‘HDD ꢁ DVD’.
The HDD to DVD Copy List screen appears.
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List
(see page 67).
HDD to DVD Copy
All
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see page 67).
HDD
1
2
3
4
HDD
HDD
• Erase All – Erase the Copy List (see page 68).
1/3
1/1
• Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Edit chapters within a
Copy List title (see page 68):
• Erase – Erase a chapter.
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
Copy List
Total 0h00m
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.
• Combine – Combine two chapters into one.
• Move – Change the chapter order.
• Preview – Check the chapter content.
Conf List
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight
the command you want from the menu options on
the left, then press ENTER. Most commands require
you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from
the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the ꢄ/
ꢅ (cursor left/right) followed by ENTER to do this.
• Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase a section of a title
in the Copy List (see page 70).
• Confirm List (Conf List) – Confirm the Copy List and
go to the recording settings screen (see Recording
the Copy List below).
64
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
Recording the Copy List
HDD to DVD Copy List commands
After putting together your Copy List, you’re ready to
record it.
Add
1
Select ‘Conf List’ to display the Copy List settings
Use this command to add titles to the Copy List.
screen.
1
Select ‘Add’ from the Copy List menu options.
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
the Recording Mode.
a title from the HDD to add to the Copy List, then
press ENTER.
HDD to DVD Copy
HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
HDD
DVD-RW VIDEO
Required 0h08m
High Speed
All
HDD
Recording Mode
1
2
3
4
4
HDD
HDD
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
Start
1/3
1/2
16:00 Sun 11/8 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1175MB
2830MB
/ 4700MB
0h32m55s
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
1
2
3
Conf List
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Conf List
• High-Speed Copy – The Copy List is copied at the
same recording quality as the original. (See page 61
for more information on high-speed copying.)
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the
lower half of the screen. If there are already titles in the
Copy List, the title is added at the end.
• FINE, SP, LP, EP, MN – The Copy List is copied at the
specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if
you copy at a higher quality setting than the original,
the copy will not be better quality than the original.)
3
Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List,
or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu
options.
• If you select MN above, you can also change the level
setting (MN1–MN32) from the Recording Quality box
that appears.
Note
• Optimized – The recording quality automatically
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-
time.
• When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame
Accurate on page 108), the following limitations on
adding titles to the Copy List apply:
– When adding titles that contain copy-once
protected material, the copy-once parts will not be
added to the Copy List.
– When adding titles that contain material of more
than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a
different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title.
– Widescreen material recorded in LP, EP or MN1–18
will not be added to the Copy List.
– Chapter markers on the copy may be up to 0.5
seconds off compared to the original.
When you change the recording mode setting, you can
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording
quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.
3
Select ‘Start’ to begin copying.
Note
• Only titles which were recorded in the same TV
system as the recorder is currently set to can be
added to the Copy List.
• When the copy mode is set to something other than
High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD,
the chapter markers of the original are not copied.
Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see
also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 108).
65
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
3
Input a name for the selected title.
Erase
Use this command to erase individual titles from the
Copy List.
Input Title Name
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the Copy List menu options.
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
_
&
a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER.
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
¨
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
µ
¶
–
/2
/4
´
HDD to DVD Copy
OK
Delete
Space
All
HDD
1
1
2
3
4
4
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) and ENTER to
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
select characters.
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
2
3
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the ꢊ/ꢋ buttons to change the cursor
position.
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Conf List
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢍ/
ꢎ).
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm that you want to erase the
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to erase more titles from
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name on page 80.
the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the
Copy List menu options.
Title Name (Ttl Name)
Use this command to name or rename titles in the Copy
List (the names of the original titles remain unchanged).
• Press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen
without changing the name.
4
To confirm the name and return to the main
1
Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Copy List menu
Copy List screen, highlight ‘OK’ and press ENTER.
options.
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to name other titles in the
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
List menu options.
a title from the Copy List to name or rename, then
press ENTER.
HDD to DVD Copy
Divide
All
Use this command to make two titles from a title already
in the Copy List.
HDD
1
2
3
4
4
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
15:00 Tue 6/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
1
Select ‘Divide’ from the Copy List menu options.
0h32m55s
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
1
2
3
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to divide, then press ENTER.
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Conf List
HDD to DVD Copy
All
HDD
1
1
2
3
4
4
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
2
3
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Conf List
66
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
3
Use the playback controls to find the place you
3
Repeat step 2 to combine more titles, or press
want to divide the title.
RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.
Divide Title
Note
HDD
16:00 Sun 11/08 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Title
2
• When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame
Accurate on page 108), the following limitations apply
when combining titles:
– Mixed aspect ratios (16:9, 4:3, 4:3 (letter box)) can’t
be combined.
2-1
0.08.13.26
ꢌ Play Pause
Divide
Back
Divide
– Mixed recording modes (EP/MN1–6, LP/MN7–18,
SP/MN19–31, FINE/MN32) can’t be combined.
Preview
You can use all the usual playback controls, including
ꢄ PLAY, ꢌ PAUSE, scan (ꢊ, ꢋ), and slow-motion
(ꢉ, ꢈ).
Use this command to check the content of a title in the
Copy List.
• Press RETURN or highlight Back and press ENTER to
go back to the main Copy List screen, leaving the title
intact.
1
Select ‘Preview’ from the Copy List menu
options.
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
4
With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide
the title at the current playback position.
a title from the Copy List to preview, then press
ENTER.
The selected title starts playing. You can return to the
Copy List screen by pressing ꢅ STOP, otherwise
playback will continue until the end of the Copy List.
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to divide other titles in the
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
List menu options.
• During preview, you can select a new thumbnail for
the Disc Navigator by pressing NAVI MARK.
Note
3
Repeat step 2 to preview other titles, or press
RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.
• When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame
Accurate on page 108), the divide points may move by
up to half a second after selecting Divide.
Move
Use this command to change the order of titles in the
Copy List.
Combine
Use this command to make a single title from two
adjacent titles in the Copy List.
1
Select ‘Move’ from the Copy List menu options.
1
Select ‘Combine’ from the Copy List menu
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
options.
a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER.
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
HDD to DVD Copy
two adjacent titles from the Copy List to combine,
then press ENTER.
All
HDD
1
1
2
3
4
4
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
HDD to DVD Copy
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
All
Preview
Move
Erase All
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
HDD
DVD
DVD
2
3
1
2
2
3
4
4
HDD
HDD
Copy List
Total 1h30m
1/3
1/2
Conf List
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
1
3
Copy List
Total 1h30m
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the
lower half of the screen.
Conf List
67
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
3
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
1
Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Copy List menu
a new position for the title, then press ENTER.
options.
The thumbnails in the Copy List reflect the new order.
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to edit, then press ENTER.
HDD to DVD Copy
All
HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
1
1
2
3
4
4
All
HDD
HDD
HDD
1
1
2
3
4
4
1/3
1/2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
HDD
HDD
Preview
Move
Erase All
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
1/3
1/2
DVD
DVD
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
2
3
0h32m55s
Preview
Move
DVD
DVD
2
3
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Erase All
Chpt Edit
Erase sec
Conf List
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Conf List
Title to move
Copy List insertion point
The chapter editing screen appears with thumbnails of
each chapter.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
List menu options.
3
Select a command from the chapter edit menu
options.
Chapter Edit
Erase All
Use this command to erase the Copy List.
HDD
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Title
Chapter
---h--m
2
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
1
Select ‘Erase All’ from the Copy List menu
options.
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
Preview
Back
1/1
HDD to DVD Copy
All
1
HDD
Chapter edit menu
The following commands are available:
2
2
3
4
4
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
Preview
Move
Erase All
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
• Erase – Erase individual chapters: Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/
ꢅ (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select a chapter to
erase. The chapter is erased after confirming.
DVD
DVD
1
3
Copy List
Erase all titles ?
Total 1h30m
Conf List
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more new
Yes
No
chapters: See Chapter Edit: Divide below.
• Combine – Combine two chapters into one: See
Chapter Edit: Combine below.
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)
• Move – Change the order of the chapters: See
Chapter Edit: Move below.
The Chapter Edit option gives you access to several
commands that you can use to edit chapters within a
Copy List title.
• Preview – Check the content of a chapter: Use the
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ(cursor buttons) to select a chapter, then
press ENTER. Once the preview has started, press ꢅ
STOP to return to the chapter edit screen.
Editing chapters in a Copy List title does not change any
actual content on the HDD. It affects only how the
chapters appear after copying.
4
Press RETURN to get back to the chapter editing
options on the left, or select another chapter
5
Select ‘Back’ (or press RETURN) to go back to the
main Copy List screen.
68
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
Chapter Edit: Divide
Chapter Edit: Combine
You can divide a chapter into as many new chapters as
This command lets you combine two chapters into one.
necessary.
1
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the
1
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the
space between the chapters to combine.
chapter to divide, then press ENTER.
Chapter Edit
2
Use the playback controls to find the place you
want to divide the chapter.
HDD
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Title
2
Chapter
---h--m
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Divide Chapter
Erase
HDD
Title 12:18 Wed 7/10
Recording Time
SP
Chapter
0h00m
Divide
Combine
Move
1
0h01m24s
1-3
ꢌ Play Pause
0.00.52.17
Preview
Back
1/1
Divide
Back
Divide
2
Press ENTER to combine.
Chapter Edit: Move
This command lets you rearrange the chapters within a
Copy List title.
You can use all the usual playback controls, including
ꢄ PLAY, ꢌ PAUSE, scan (ꢊ, ꢋ), and slow-motion
(ꢉ, ꢈ).
1
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the
chapter you want to move, then press ENTER.
3
With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide
the chapter at the current playback position.
You can divide the chapter as many times as you want
(up to 99 per title).
Chapter Edit
HDD
Title
2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Chapter
0h05m
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
4
Select ‘Back’ (or press RETURN) to get back to the
main Chapter Edit screen.
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
Note
Preview
• When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame
Accurate on page 108), the divide point may move by
up to half a second after selecting Divide.
Back
1/1
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select a
new position for the chapter, then press ENTER.
Title to move
Chapter Edit
HDD
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Title
2
Chapter
---h--m
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
Preview
Back
1/1
Insertion point
The thumbnails in the chapter list reflect the new order.
69
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
6
Repeat steps 3 to 5 if you want to erase more
Erase Section (Erase Sec)
sections from the same title.
Using this command you can delete a part of a Copy List
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a
recording made from the TV.
7
Select ‘Back’ (or press RETURN) to get back to the
main Copy List screen.
1
Select ‘Erase Sec’ from the Copy List menu
options.
Note
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
• When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame
Accurate on page 108), the ‘From’ time and length of
the erased section may differ by up to 0.5 seconds
from that set.
the title you want to erase a section from, then press
ENTER.
After selecting a title, a screen appears from which you
can mark the start and end points of the section to erase.
Erase Sec
HDD
16:00 Sun 11/08 Pr 5 LP
Title
2
Recording Time
0h32m55s
2-1
ꢌ Play Pause
0.06.52.17
A
B
Erase Sec
Back
From
To
3
Use the playback controls to find the start of the
section to erase, then (with ‘From’ highlighted) press
ENTER.
You can use all the usual playback controls, including
ꢄ PLAY, ꢌ PAUSE, scan (ꢊ, ꢋ), and slow-motion
(ꢉ, ꢈ).
The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
appears under the bar to show the start of the section.
ꢌ Play Pause
A
B
From
0.02.09.17
T
A
4
In the same way, find the end of the section to
erase, then (with ‘To’ highlighted) press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker appears under the
bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself
marked in red.
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
70
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
Copying from DVD to HDD*
Currently selected DVD title
DVD to HDD Copy
Original
DVD
1
2
3
4
4
DVD
DVD
1/3
1/2
16:00 Sun 8/11 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
Information for the
selected title
0h32m55s
Copy List
menu options
Add
Erase
Move
HDD
HDD
1
2
3
Copy List titles
Preview
Erase All
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Running time of the
Copy List
Conf List
Use the DVD to HDD Copy screen to transfer video on
DVD to the hard disk.
* See also Copyright on page 62.
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
Important
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen is not accessible when
a finalized Video mode disc is loaded. However, you
can still use the One Touch Copy function (see One
Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) on page 62).
PREV
NEXT
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
• The copy list will be erased if:
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or
edited.
DISPLAY
– the disc tray is opened.
– playback is switched between Original and Play
List.
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 112).
1
Load the recordable DVD disc that contains the
material you want to copy to the HDD.
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.
• It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or PC.
Timer Recording
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
Disc History
PhotoViewer
DV Record
DVR-520H/720H screen
• Note that the Copy option will not be available if the
TV system of the recorder and the disc do not match.
(See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change
the TV system of the recorder.)
71
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
3
Select ‘DVD ꢁ HDD’.
The DVD to HDD Copy screen appears.
Recording the Copy List
After putting together your Copy List, you’re ready to
record it.
DVD to HDD Copy
Original
DVD
1
2
3
4
1
Select ‘Conf List’ to display the Copy List settings
screen.
DVD
DVD
1/3
1/1
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
Add
Erase
Move
HDD
HDD
the Recording Mode.
Preview
Erase All
Copy List
Total 0h00m
DVD to HDD Copy
Original
DVD
Conf List
DVD
HDD
Required 1h30m
SP
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight
the command you want from the menu options on
the left, then press ENTER. Most commands require
you then to select a title or location from the
thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the ꢄ/ꢅ
(cursor left/right) followed by ENTER to do this.
Recording Mode
Start
Add
Erase
Move
Preview
Erase All
Copy List Total
Current HDD Remain
1h30m
30h00m
/ 34h00m
Conf List
• When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the
PREV (ꢍ) and NEXT (ꢎ) buttons to display the
previous/next page if there are more titles than will fit
on the screen.
• High-Speed Copy – Only available when copying
Original content from a VR mode disc. The Copy List
is copied at the same recording quality as the
original. (See page 61 for more information on high-
speed copying.)
• As you highlight different thumbnails, information
about the title is shown in the central area of the
screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information
displayed.
• FINE, SP, LP, EP, MN – The Copy List is copied at the
specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if
you copy at a higher quality setting than the original,
the copy will not be better quality than the original.)
• Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left from the thumbnail area of the Copy List
screen.
• If you select MN above, you can also change the level
setting (MN1–MN32) from the Recording Quality box
that appears.
When you change the recording mode setting, you can
see how much hard disk space it will require. If this is
more than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t
be able to start copying. In this case, either change the
recording quality, or press RETURN to go back to the
Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the
Copy List.
DVD to HDD Copy List menu options
Use the following commands when making a DVD to
HDD Copy List:
• Add – Select and add titles to the Copy List (see
page 73).
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see page 73).
3
Select ‘Start’ to begin copying.
• Erase All – Erase the Copy List (see page 74).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List
(see page 74).
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
page 73).
• Confirm List (Conf List) – Confirm the Copy List and
go to the recording settings screen (see Recording
the Copy List below).
72
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
Erase
Use this command to erase individual titles from the
Copy List.
DVD to HDD Copy List commands
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the Copy List menu options.
Add
Use this command to add titles to the Copy List.
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER.
1
Select ‘Add’ from the Copy List menu options.
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
DVD to HDD Copy
Play List
DVD
a title from the DVD to add to the Copy List, then
press ENTER.
1
1
2
3
4
4
DVD
DVD
1/3
1/2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
DVD to HDD Copy
Play List
DVD
0h32m55s
Add
Erase
Move
HDD
HDD
2
3
1
2
3
4
4
Preview
Erase All
DVD
DVD
Copy List
Total 1h30m
1/3
1/2
16:00 Sun 8/11 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
Conf List
0h32m55s
Add
Erase
Move
HDD
HDD
1
2
3
Preview
Erase All
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm that you want to erase the
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Conf List
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to erase more titles from
the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the
Copy List menu options.
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the
lower half of the screen. If there are already titles in the
Copy List, the title is added at the end.
Move
3
Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List,
Use this command to change the order of titles currently
in the Copy List.
or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu
options.
1
Select ‘Move’ from the Copy List menu options.
Note
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER.
• Titles which were recorded directly to a VR mode disc
or have already been copied real-time, and which
contain bilingual audio or are recorded in recording
modes MN12–MN20 can be added to the Copy List,
however if High-Speed Copy is selected they will not
actually be copied.
DVD to HDD Copy
Play List
DVD
1
1
2
3
4
4
DVD
DVD
1/3
1/2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
• Similarly, a copy-once protected title, recorded from
the TV for example, can be added to the Copy List, but
it will not be copied if High-Speed Copy is selected.
Add
Erase
Move
HDD
HDD
2
3
Preview
Erase All
Copy List
Total 1h30m
• You may not be able to copy titles when copying a
disc that was created using a PC or another recorder.
Conf List
73
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
3
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
Erase All
Use this command to erase the Copy List.
the insertion point for the title, then press ENTER.
1
Select ‘Erase All’ from the Copy List menu
DVD to HDD Copy
Play List
DVD
options.
1
1
2
3
4
4
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
DVD
DVD
press ENTER.
1/3
1/2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
Add
Erase
Move
HDD
HDD
2
3
DVD to HDD Copy
Play List
DVD
Preview
Erase All
Copy List
Total 1h30m
1
2
2
3
4
4
Conf List
DVD
DVD
1/3
1/2
Add
Erase
Move
Title to move
Copy List insertion point
HDD
HDD
1
3
Preview
Erase All
Copy List
Erase all titles ?
Total 1h30m
Conf List
Yes
No
The thumbnails in the Copy List are updated to reflect the
new order.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
List menu options.
Using disc back-up*
This feature offers a simple way to make a back-up copy
of a finalized Video mode disc. The data is copied first to
the hard disk drive, then on to another recordable DVD
disc.
Preview
Use this command to check the content of a title in the
Copy List.
* See also Copyright on page 62.
1
Select ‘Preview’ from the Copy List menu
options.
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select ‘Copy’
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to preview, then press
ENTER.
Select ‘Disc Back-up’.
Select a back-up option.
The selected title starts playing. You can return to the
Copy List screen by pressing ꢅ STOP, otherwise
playback will continue until the end of the Copy List.
Disc Back-up
3
Repeat step 2 to preview other titles, or press
RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.
Start new disc back-up
Resume writing data
Erase back-up data
There are three back-up options:
• Start new disc back-up – Start making a back-up of
a disc.
• Resume writing data – Record the back-up data
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.
• Erase back-up data – Erase the back-up data on the
HDD.
74
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
07
5
Press ꢆ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE
TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However,
this will make the disc unusable (although if you are
using a DVD-RW disc you can re-initialize it in order
to make it usable again—see Initializing a DVD-RW
disc on page 60.)
load the disc you want to make a back-up of, then
close the disc tray.
You can only make back-up copies of finalized Video
mode discs.
Disc Back-up
9
After the recorder has finished recording the
No Disc.
back-up disc, you can select whether to make
another back-up of the same data or exit.
Please load a disc to be backed-up.
Start
Cancel
Disc Back-up
Disc back-up finished.
6
Select ‘Start’.
To make another back-up copy, please load
a recordable disc.
Disc Back-up
Start
Cancel
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Start reading?
• Select Start to make another back-up copy or Cancel
to finish. If you want to make another back-up copy,
return to step 6 above.
Start
Cancel
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY.
10 If you don’t need to keep the back-up data on
the HDD, you can delete it now.
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE
TOUCH COPY for more than one second.
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).
7
When the data has been copied, press ꢆ OPEN/
CLOSE to open the disc tray. Take out the disc and
load a blank* recordable DVD.
Disc Back-up
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
Erasing it will increase the free space
available. OK to Erase?
* If you’re using a DVD-RW, the disc doesn’t have to be
blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be
erased in the back-up process.
Yes
No
Disc Back-up
• If you decide to leave the back-up data on the HDD,
you can make back-up copies to recordable DVD
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
Please eject the disc and load a
recordable disc.
Start
Cancel
Note
You can use a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 disc, or DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 or
Ver. 1.2 / 4x for the back-up.
• It is not possible to play material on the HDD that has
been backed-up from DVD.
• If you back-up a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot
undo the finalization later.
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If
this happens, please try another brand of disc.
8
Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data
to the blank disc.
Disc Back-up
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.
The disc contents will be overwritten.
OK to start?
Start
Cancel
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY.
75
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
CEhdapitetri8ng
Using the Disc Navigator you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD discs, as well as
video content on the internal hard disk drive (HDD). The editing features available in the Disc Navigator depend on
whether you are editing video on a Video mode or VR mode DVD, or the HDD, and whether you’re editing Original
content, or a Play List.
With unfinalized Video mode DVDs, there are a limited number of editing commands, including naming, locking and
erasing titles. Once a Video mode disc has been finalized, further editing is not possible.
There are two ways to edit VR mode DVD-RW discs. You can directly edit the Original content of the disc, or you can
create and edit a Play List. The Play List doesn’t actually change any of the content on the disc, but just controls how
the content is played back (rather like the program play feature found on CD players).
Editing material recorded on the HDD is similar to editing the Original content of a VR mode DVD-RW, with similar
commands for erasing, naming and locking titles, as well as fine control over the content of chapters within titles.
The Disc Navigator screen
DVD Disc Navigator
Edit mode
Currently selected title
Disc Navigator
Video Mode
DVD
1
2
3
6
Disc recording
mode
Locked title
indicator
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
0h30m40s
Disc Navigator
menu options
Play
5
Erase
Recording time
available in the displayed
recording mode
Ttl Name
Lock
Erase All
Undo
1/1
Number of title
pages
Information for
selected title
76
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
HDD Disc Navigator
Currently selected title
HDD group tabs
Disc Navigator
Group1
Group2
Group3
3
Group4
All
HDD
1
2
NEW
New indicator
Recording time
available in the displayed
recording mode
Selected Group
Disc Navigator
menu options
All
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
HDD Remain
6h12m(FINE)
0h30m40s
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
4
5
6
Locked title
indicator
1/1
Number of title
pages
Information for
selected title
Auto Replace
Recording indicator
Important
ONE TOUCH
COPY
• Titles that have been recorded with a Line Input
setting different to the current setting of the recorder
are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank
thumbnail image. See also Input Line System on
page 98.
HDD
DVD
• During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a
mark. These titles were recorded with a Line Input
setting different to the current setting of the recorder.
During recording, these titles cannot be played.
CLEAR
DISC NAVIGATOR
PLAY LIST
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
PLAY
PREV
NEXT
DISPLAY
DVD RECORDER
77
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
1
Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or
• You can switch between the HDD and the DVD Disc
Navigator screens using the HDD and DVD buttons
(front panel or remote).
the DVD.
2
Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc
You can copy a selected HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to
HDD by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY (see also page 62
for more on One Touch Copy).
Navigator screen.
Playback will automatically stop when you do this.
When editing HDD content, a row of group names
appears above the title thumbnails (see Editing HDD
groups on page 84 for more details). You can access
these by pressing ꢂ (cursor up) repeatedly until the All
group is highlighted, then using the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/
right) buttons to select a group. Press ENTER to ‘open’
the highlighted group.
Disc Navigator
Original
DVD
1
4
2
5
3
6
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
Titles on the HDD marked with a
icon are timer
Undo
1/1
recordings set to Auto Replace Recording (see Standard
timer recording on page 51).
• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the
Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Disc
Navigator then press ENTER).
Titles on the HDD marked with a
recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.
icon are recently
3
To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU.
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight
the command you want from the menu options on
the left, then press ENTER. Most commands require
you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from
the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the ꢂ/
ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) followed by ENTER to do
this.
Remember
• You can change the thumbnail pictures used for titles
using the NAVI MARK button—see Changing the
thumbnail picture for a title on page 37.
• When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the
PREV (ꢍ) and NEXT (ꢎ) buttons to display the
previous/next page if there are more than six titles/
nine chapters.
Disc Navigator menu options
The commands available from the Disc Navigator for the
VR mode and Video mode discs and the HDD are shown
below.
• As you highlight different thumbnails, information
about the title is shown in the central area of the
screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information
displayed.
Video mode
• If you are editing a VR mode disc, press PLAYLIST to
switch between Original and Play List Disc Navigator
screens.
• Play – Play a title (page 79)
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title
(page 80)
Playlist / Original indicator
• Lock/Unlock – Lock or unlock a title to prevent
accidental changes being made (page 82)
Disc Navigator
Play List
• Erase – Erase a title (page 79)
DVD
1
2
5
3
6
• Erase All – Erase all titles (page 83)
• Undo – Undo the last change (page 83)
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play
Erase
4
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
VR mode
(Original)
• Play – Play a title (page 79)
1/1
Undo
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title
(page 80)
• Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left from the thumbnail area of the Disc
Navigator.
• Lock/Unlock – Lock or unlock a title to prevent
accidental changes being made (page 82)
• Erase – Erase a title (page 79)
• Erase All – Erase all titles (page 83)
78
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
• Undo – Undo the last change (page 83)
• Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Make detailed changes to
chapters in a title (page 81)
Editing VR mode Original, Video
mode and HDD content
• Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase a part of a title
(page 82)
These commands affect the actual content stored on the
DVD-R/RW or HDD.
HDD
Remember
• Play – Play a title (page 79)
• If you are editing a VR mode disc, use the PLAYLIST
button to switch to the Disc Navigator Original
screen.
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title
(page 80)
• Lock/Unlock – Lock or unlock a title to prevent
accidental changes being made (page 82)
Play
• Erase – Erase a title (page 79)
VR mode Video mode
HDD
• Erase All – Erase all titles (page 83)
Use this function to start playback of a title.
Select ‘Play’ from the Disc Navigator menu
• Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Make detailed changes
to chapters in a title (page 81)
1
• Divide – Divide a title into two (page 83)
options.
• Change Group (Chg Group) – Assign a title to a
group on the HDD (page 84)
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the
title you want to play, then press ENTER or ꢄ PLAY.
• Group Name (Grp Name) – Name or rename an
HDD group (page 84)
Disc Navigator
Video Mode
DVD
• Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase part of a title
(page 82)
1
2
3
6
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
VR mode
(Play List)
Play
Erase
4
5
• Create – Make a new Play List title (page 87)
Ttl Name
Lock
Erase All
• Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Make detailed changes to
chapters in a Play List title (page 86)
Undo
1/1
• Move – Move the position of a title in the Play List
(page 87)
Playback of the title you selected starts.
• Erase All – Erase all titles in the Play List (page 88)
• Undo – Undo the last change (page 88)
• Play – Play a title (page 85)
Erase
VR mode Video mode
HDD
• Erase – Erase a title from the Play List (page 85)
The Erase title command does slightly different things
depending on what you are currently editing. If you are
editing Original content on a VR mode disc or content on
the HDD, the title will be erased from the disc and the
available recording time will increase accordingly.
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title in
the Play List (page 85)
• Combine – Combine two Play List titles into one
(page 88)
• Divide – Divide a Play List title into two (page 88)
If you erase titles from a Video mode DVD-R disc, the title
will disappear from the list of titles, but the available
recording time will not increase. Erasing a title from a
Video mode DVD-RW disc increases the available
recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.
• Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase a part of a title
(page 86)
79
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the Disc Navigator menu
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the ꢊ/ꢋ buttons to change the cursor
position.
options.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the
title you want to erase, then press ENTER.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢍ/
ꢎ).
Disc Navigator
Original
DVD
1
2
3
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name below.
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
Erase Title?
Undo
1/1
No
Yes
4
Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the
3
Highlight ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.
press ENTER.
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to erase.
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to name.
Tip
Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name
The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts
that you can use to input characters in the name input
screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the
characters shown.
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing
ENTER. (You can also use this method to erase titles
when using the Play function, above.)
If you want to enter two characters in succession that are
both on the same button (for example a P and an R),
press ꢋ to advance the cursor one space manually
between inputting the two characters.
Title Name (Ttl Name)
VR mode Video mode
HDD
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long
for VR mode and HDD recordings and 32 characters for
Video mode recordings.
Key
1
Characters
Key
6
Characters
. , ’ ? ! – & 1
m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ
1
Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Disc Navigator menu
a b c 2 ä à á â ã
æ ç
p q r s 7 $
2
7
options.
*1
ÿ/ß
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the
d e f 3 è é ë ê
g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡
j k l 5 £
t u v 8 ü ù û ú
w x y z 9
3
4
8
9
title you want to name, then press ENTER to go to
the name input screen.
3
Input a name for the selected title.
0
5
0
ꢊ
[cursor back]
[change case]
ꢋ
CLEAR
[cursor forward]
[clear character]
Input Title Name
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
ꢍ/
ꢎ
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
ꢌ
<space>
ꢅ
[finish name input]
_
&
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14
/
~
o
1
1
3
VIDEO
Plus+
2
3
¿
¶
–
/
2
/
4
( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ # ∗ % ¥ | + =
´
OK
Clear
Space
{ } [ ] < >
*1
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) and ENTER to
select characters.
80
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
• Preview – Preview chapters: Select the chapter you
want to play; press ꢅ STOP to return to the chapter
edit screen.
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)
VR mode
HDD
When editing VR mode DVDs or video on the HDD you
can edit individual chapters within a title, with
commands for erasing, combining and dividing. You can
also play individual chapters to check their content.
• Undo – Undo the last command (only works with VR
mode disc edits).
3
Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left side of the screen.
1
Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Disc Navigator menu
4
To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press
RETURN again, or select ‘Back’ from the menu
options on the left.
options.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the
title that contains the chapters you want to edit,
then press ENTER.
Note
• When editing VR mode Original content, it may not
be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds
long.
Chapter Edit
Original
DVD
Title
1
Chapter
0h03m
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
2
1
4
7
3
6
9
• It may not always be possible to combine two
chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter
has been divided into three, then the middle chapter
erased, it is not possible to combine the two
remaining chapters into one.
5
8
Erase
Divide
Combine
Preview
Undo
Back
1/1
Inserting chapter markers into a title
After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear
and you’ll see that the Disc Navigator menu items
change to the chapter editing commands:
VR mode
HDD
You can create new chapters within a title using the CHP
MARK button while playing the title or during recording.
This is useful not just for navigation of the disc content
but also for editing purposes.
• Erase – Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want
to erase and press ENTER (see also the note below).
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts:
Select the chapter you want to divide. From the
following screen use the playback controls (ꢄ, ꢌ,
ꢊ, ꢋ, etc.) to find the point at which you want to
divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press
ENTER.
PAUSE
ꢉ
ꢈ
Divide Chapter
Original
CHP
MARK
DVD
Title 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h01m24s
Chapter
0h00m
1
1-3
ꢌ Play Pause
0.00.52.17
Divide
Back
1
Start playback of the title you want to create
Divide
new chapter markers in.
You can use the Play command from the Disc Navigator
menu to do this.
2
Press CHP MARK at any point where you want a
new chapter to begin.
A chapter marker icon appears on-screen briefly to
confirm a new chapter mark has been inserted:
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD disc or 99
chapters per HDD title). Highlight Back and press
ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit screen.
• Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into one:
Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent
chapters and press ENTER (see also the note below)
81
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
• For greater control over the exact position of chapter
markers it can be useful to use the ꢌ PAUSE button
and/or the slow-motion and frame advance/reverse
controls (ꢉ/ꢈ).
3
Use the playback controls (ꢄ, ꢌ, ꢊ, ꢋ, etc.) to
find the start of the section to erase, then (with
‘From’ highlighted) press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
appears under the bar to show the start of the section.
Note
• You cannot insert chapter markers during Auto Start
Recording.
ꢌ Play Pause
• If you pause a recording in VR mode, the recorder
automatically starts a new chapter when you restart
the recording.
A
B
From
0.02.09.17
T
• When recording in Video mode, the recorder
automatically puts chapter markers in at regular
intervals. It is not possible to add extra chapter
markers manually after recording (see also Auto
Chapter (Video) on page 108).
A
4
In the same way, find the end of the section to
erase, then (with ‘To’ highlighted) press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker appears under the
bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself
marked in red.
• The Play List and Original content on a disc can each
contain up to 999 chapters.
• Each HDD title can contain a maximum of 99
chapters.
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
• Similar chapter editing commands are available for
HDD content from the HDD to DVD copy screen. See
also Copying from HDD to DVD* on page 63.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not
be able to erase very short sections (less than five
seconds).
Erase Section (Erase Sec)
VR mode
HDD
6
Erase another section from the same title, or
Using this command you can delete a part of an Original
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a
recording made from the TV.
press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator
screen.
1
Select ‘Erase Sec’ from the Disc Navigator menu
Lock / Unlock
options.
VR mode Video mode
HDD
2
title.
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select a
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock
it later.
After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from
which you can mark the start and end points of the
section to erase.
Important
Erase Sec
Original
DVD
• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock
command using the Undo option from the Disc
Navigator menu.
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h01m24s
Title
1
1-1
ꢌ Play Pause
0.00.52.17
A
B
Erase Sec
Back
From
To
82
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
1
Select ‘Lock’ from the Disc Navigator menu
Undo
options.
VR mode Video mode
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,
you can undo the last three edits you made).
title you want to lock (or unlock), then press ENTER.
Disc Navigator
Original
DVD
•
Select ‘Undo’ from the Disc Navigator menu
1
2
3
options.
• You can’t undo anything after ejecting the disc from
the recorder or switching the recorder into standby.
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP
4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Lock
Erase All
• You can’t undo the following operations: initializing,
recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking
titles.
1/1
Undo
Divide
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator
with a padlock icon.
HDD
Use this command to divide a title on the HDD into two.
Note that once divided, the two new titles cannot be
recombined into one again.
3
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to lock/unlock.
1
Select ‘Divide’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options.
Erase All
2
Select the title that you want to divide, then
VR mode Video mode
HDD
press ENTER.
This erases all unlocked titles from the disc (see also Lock
/ Unlock on page 82).
Divide Title
1
Select ‘Erase All’ from the Disc Navigator menu
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h01m24s
HDD
Title
2
options.
2-1
ꢌ Play Pause
0.00.08.26
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
Divide
Back
press ENTER.
Divide
Disc Navigator
Original
DVD
1
2
3
3
Use the standard playback controls to find the
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Lock
Erase All
place you want to divide the title.
4
4
With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide
the title at the current playback position.
Erase all titles?
Undo
1/1
No
Yes
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm you want to divide the
title.
Select No if you want to cancel and leave the title intact.
6
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to divide.
83
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
Group Name (Grp Name)
Editing HDD groups
HDD
HDD
Use this command to rename a group.
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize
your HDD video content there are four ‘groups’. You can
move content from group to group, and rename the
groups as you want.
1
Select ‘Grp Name’ from the Disc Navigator menu.
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
the group that you want to name or rename, then
press ENTER.
Input Group Name
Group 1
Change Group (Chg Group)
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
HDD
CAPS
small
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
Use this command to assign titles to a particular group.
_
&
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
1
Select ‘Chg Group’ from the Disc Navigator
menu, then press ENTER.
< < 14
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¶
–
/
2
/
4
´
OK
Clear
Space
2
Select the title that you want to put into a
different group, then press ENTER.
3
Input a name for the group.
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
The name can be up to six characters long.
a group for the title, then press ENTER.
• You can select one of the four groups, or choose No
Group, in which case it will only appear when All is
selected.
4
To finish entering the name, highlight ‘Exit’ and
press ENTER.
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another group to name.
Disc Navigator
HDD
21:00 Fri 6/09 Pr 5 LP
Title 1
No Group
All
Creating and editing a VR mode Play
List
GROUP1
Lock
Erase All
Grp Name
Chg Group
GROUP2
GROUP3
GROUP4
VR mode
Divide
A Play List is a kind of virtual content based on the actual
(Original) content of the disc. The main advantages of
this type of editing is that it is non-destructive of the video
content on the disc, and it allows greater control over
editing, so that you end up with the content exactly as you
want it.
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to change the
group of.
Remember
• Use the PLAYLIST button to switch to the Play List
edit screen.
• The Play List can contain a maximum of 99 titles.
84
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
Play
Title Name (Ttl Name)
VR mode
VR mode
Use this function to start playback of a title.
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters
long.
1
Select ‘Play’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
1
Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Disc Navigator Play
List menu options.
2
Select the title you want to play, then press
ENTER.
2
Select the title you want to name, then press
ENTER.
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
3
Input a name for the selected title.
1
2
3
Input Title Name
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
_
&
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
Undo
1/1
< < 14
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
¶
–
/2
/4
´
OK
Clear
Space
Playback of the title you selected starts.
Press ENTER after selecting each character.
Erase
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the ꢊ/ꢋ buttons to change the cursor
position.
VR mode
This command erases a title only from the Play List. The
title remains in the Original content and the available
recording time does not increase.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢍ/
ꢎ).
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name on page 80.
2
Select the title you want to erase, then press
ENTER.
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
1
2
3
4
Highlight ‘OK’, then press ENTER to fix the name
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.
Erase Title?
Undo
1/1
No
Yes
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to name.
3
Highlight ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to erase.
Note
• The remaining recording time doesn’t change when
you erase something from the Play List.
85
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
• Preview – Preview chapters: Select the chapter you
want to play; press ꢅ STOP to return to the chapter
edit screen.
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)
VR mode
When editing VR mode DVDs you can edit individual
chapters within a title, with commands for erasing,
moving, combining and dividing. You can also play
individual chapters to check their content.
• Undo – Undo the last command.
3
Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left side of the screen.
4
To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press
1
Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Disc Navigator Play
RETURN again, or select ‘Back’ from the menu
options on the left.
List menu options.
2
Select the title that contains the chapters you
want to edit, then press ENTER.
Erase Section (Erase Sec)
After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear
and you’ll see that the Disc Navigator menu items
change to the chapter editing commands:
VR mode
Using this command you can delete a part of a Play List
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a
recording made from the TV.
Chapter Edit
Play List
DVD
Title
1
Chapter
0h03m
15:00 Wed11/12 Pr 5 LP
2
1
Select ‘Erase Sec’ from the Disc Navigator menu
1
4
7
3
6
9
options.
5
8
Erase
2
title.
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select a
Divide
Combine
Move
After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from
which you can mark the start and end points of the
section to erase.
Undo
Back
1/1
• Erase – Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want
to erase and press ENTER.
Erase Sec
Play List
DVD
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h01m24s
Title
1
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts:
Select the chapter you want to divide. From the
following screen use the playback controls (ꢄ, ꢌ,
ꢊ, ꢋ, etc.) to find the point at which you want to
divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press
ENTER.
1-2
ꢌ Play Pause
0.00.52.17
A
B
Erase Sec
Back
From
To
Divide Chapter
Play List
DVD
Title 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h01m24s
Chapter
0h00m
1
3
Use the playback controls (ꢄ, ꢌ, ꢊ, ꢋ, etc.) to
1-3
ꢌ Play Pause
0.00.52.17
find the start of the section to erase, then (with
‘From’ highlighted) press ENTER.
Divide
Back
The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
appears under the bar to show the start of the section.
Divide
ꢌ Play Pause
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as
you want (up to 999 chapters per disc). Highlight
Back and press ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit
screen.
A
B
From
0.02.09.17
T
A
• Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into one:
Select the dividing line between two adjacent
chapters and press ENTER.
4
In the same way, find the end of the section to
erase, then (with ‘To’ highlighted) press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker appears under the
bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself
marked in red.
• Move – Rearrange chapters: Select the chapter you
want to move, press ENTER, then highlight the new
location for it, then press ENTER again.
86
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
4
Press ENTER to add the title.
press ENTER.
The new title appears in the updated Play List.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
1
2
3
6
Erase another section from the same title, or
press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator
screen.
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
Create
Undo
1/1
VR mode
Use this function to add an Original title to the Play List.
When you do this, the whole title is put into the Play List
(you can erase bits you don’t need later—see Chapter Edit
(Chpt Edit) on page 86).
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another location for a new
title.
The title appears in the Play List complete with the
chapter markers that appear in the Original. However, if
you add more chapter markers to the Original later, these
are not automatically copied over into the Play List title.
Move
VR mode
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play
List titles.
You can add up to 99 titles to the Play List.
1
Select ‘Create’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
1
Select ‘Move’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
menu options.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the
2
Select the title you want to move, then press
insertion point for the new title, then press ENTER.
ENTER.
Disc Navigator
Play List
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
DVD
1
2
1
2
3
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP
4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
Divide
Create
Move
Combine
Erase All
Divide
Combine
Erase All
Undo
1/1
Undo
1/1
If there are no titles in the Play List yet, this step does not
apply.
3
Select a new position in the Play List for the title,
then press ENTER.
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select an
Original title to put into the Play List.
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
1
2
3
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
ORG1
ORG2
ORG3
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
4
Divide
Combine
Erase All
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP
ORG4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
Divide
Undo
1/1
Combine
Erase All
Undo
1/1
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
87
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
08
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
menu options, or select another title to move.
Disc Navigator
Divide
Play List
DVD
1
2
3
VR mode
Use this command to split a title up into two new titles.
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
1
Select ‘Divide’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
2
Select the title that you want to divide, then
1/1
Undo
press ENTER.
3
Use the playback controls to find the place you
3
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
want to divide the title.
menu options, or continue combining more titles.
Divide Chapter
Play List
DVD
Erase All
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h01m24s
Title
1
1-1
ꢌ Play Pause
0.00.08.26
VR mode
This command erases all the titles from the Play List.
Divide
Back
Divide
1
Select ‘Erase All’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
You can use all the usual playback controls, including
ꢄ PLAY, ꢌ PAUSE, scan (ꢊ, ꢋ), and slow-motion
(ꢉ, ꢈ).
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
1
2
3
4
With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide
the title at the current playback position.
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
4
5
To return to the Disc Navigator menu options,
Divide
Combine
Erase All
select ‘Back’ and press ENTER.
Erase all titles?
Undo
1/1
No
Yes
Combine
VR mode
Undo
Use this function to combine two adjacent Play List titles
into one.
VR mode
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,
you can undo the last three edits you made).
1
Select ‘Combine’ from the Disc Navigator Play
List menu options.
2
Highlight the bar divider between the two titles
•
Select ‘Undo’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
you want to combine, then press ENTER.
menu options.
• You can’t undo anything after ejecting the disc from
Disc Navigator
the recorder or switching the recorder into standby.
Play List
DVD
1
4
2
3
• You can’t undo the following operations: initializing,
recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking
titles.
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
1/1
Undo
88
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc History
09
Chapter 9
Disc History
VR mode Video mode
The Disc History screen lets you see how much recording space remains on the last 30 recordable DVD discs loaded.
It also displays information such as disc name, the first three title names, number of titles recorded, recording mode
and the lock status of the disc.
Available
recording space
Disc name
Disc History
1/2
LP
Recording mode
Disc Name
News
Sport
Travel
Movie
Music
DVD Remain
Disc loaded
1h54m
2h35m
1h22m
0h30m
1h38m
Selected disc
Recording time
available
Other discs
Number of
Title information
for the selected
disc
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Today's Football
Enjoy Golf!
Social dance Lesson
Titles
:
8
titles on disc
DVD-RW VR
System
625
Disc type and
recording mode
Recorded Line
System of disc
Disc lock indicator
3
To exit the Disc History screen, press HOME
MENU or DISC HISTORY.
Using the Disc History
1
Press DISC HISTORY to display the Disc History
Note
screen.
• When you initialize a DVD-RW disc or record a
DVD-R disc for the first time, the recorder
automatically names the disc DISC ** (where ** is a
number from 1 to 99). You can rename the disc if you
want to (see Input Disc Name on page 92).
The most recently loaded disc appears at the top of the
list, with previously loaded discs below it. If there is a disc
loaded, it is shown in the list with a ‘disc in’ icon.
• The Disc History screen is also accessible from the
Home Menu.
• When you change the display for the available
recording time using the REC MODE button, only the
display is changed; the actual recording mode is not
affected.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to see
title information for other discs in the list.
• To remove a disc from the list, press CLEAR (you
can’t remove the currently loaded disc).
• The following discs appear in the Disc History list in
gray:
– Discs with no available recording space left
– Locked discs
• You can see the available recording time for different
recording modes by pressing the REC MODE button.
– Discs that contain the maximum 99 titles and/or
999 chapters
– Discs recorded with a Line Input setting different to
the recorder’s current setting.
• When a Video mode disc is finalized, the information
for that disc disappears from the Disc History.
89
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PhotoViewer
Chapter 10
10
The PhotoViewer
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW on your TV.
Currently selected thumbnail
PhotoViewer
File
Chair No. 2
x
Date/Time 10:00 12/05/2003
Size 1920 1440
File information
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
01. 12/12 TUE
02. 13/12 WED
03. 14/12 THU
04. 15/12 FRI
05. 16/12 SAT
06. 17/12 SUN
07. 18/12 MON
08. 19/12 TUE
Currently selected
folder in folder list
Pages in file
view
Pages in
folder list
1/2
1/3
Note
Playing a slideshow
• Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there
are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still
possible to view them all using the Reload function
(see below).
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to
display the PhotoViewer screen.
• The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc
containing JPEG files is loaded.
• The time it takes for the recorder to load a file
increases with large file sizes.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
a folder from the folder list.
The first nine images from the selected folder are
displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen.
• Pictures with an aspect ratio different to your TV
screen will appear with black bars top and bottom, or
either side (depending on the picture).
• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that
the disc and file formats are compatible with this
recorder (see JPEG file compatibility on page 10).
3
Press ENTER to move to the thumbnail view area.
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.
• To get back to the folder list, press RETURN.
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select a
Reloading files from a disc
thumbnail.
If you have a disc with a large number of files and/or
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload
function.
• Use the ꢍ and ꢎ buttons to display the previous/
next page of thumbnails.
5
Press ENTER or ꢄ PLAY to start playing a
1
Use the ꢃ (cursor down) button to navigate to
slideshow from the selected thumbnail.
• Use the ꢍ PREV / NEXT ꢎ buttons to display the
previous/next picture, or the ꢌ PAUSE button to
pause the slideshow.
the last entry in the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).
2
Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999
files/99 folders from the disc.
It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the
images.
6
Press ꢅ STOP or RETURN to return to the
thumbnail view area.
7
To return to the folder view area, press RETURN.
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU.
90
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PhotoViewer
10
Note
• You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer
screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you
enter the PhotoViewer again, it will resume
reloading.)
Zooming the screen
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move
the area of the picture displayed.
1
During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL + button
to zoom the picture.
2x Zoom
ꢁ
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and
4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to move the
zoomed area within the picture.
Rotating the screen
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow
so you can always view pictures the right way up,
whichever way they were taken.
•
During a slideshow, press ANGLE to rotate the
displayed picture clockwise by 90º.
Press ANGLE repeatedly to continue rotating the picture
in increments of 90º.
ꢁ
91
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Disc Setup menu
11
Chapter 11
The Disc Setup menu
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home menu:
2
Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long
for a VR mode disc, or 32 for a Video mode disc.
Input Disc Name
DISC7
•
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
_
&
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
¨
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
µ
¶
–
/2
/4
´
Timer Recording
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
OK
Clear
Space
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
Disc History
PhotoViewer
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) and ENTER to
DV Record
select characters.
DVR-520H/720H Screen
• Use the ꢊ/ꢋ buttons to change the cursor
position.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢍ/
ꢎ).
Basic settings
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name on page 80.
Input Disc Name
VR mode Video mode
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from
DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name
function to change the default disc name to something
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
Note
• You cannot input a name for a disc if the TV line
system of the disc is different to the current setting of
the recorder. See Input Line System on page 98 for
how to change the recorder’s setting.
1
Select ‘Input Disc Name’ from the Basic options,
then ‘Next Screen’.
Disc Setup
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
Next Screen
Lock Disc
VR mode
• Default setting: Off
Disc Setup
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
On
Off
Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or
erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc
to make edits, select Off.
92
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Disc Setup menu
11
Important
Finalize settings
• A locked disc can still be initialized (which will
completely erase the disc).
Finalize
DVD-R
DVD-RW
Note
• You cannot change the lock setting for a disc if the TV
line system of the disc is different to the current
setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on
page 98 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on
page 59 for detailed instructions.
Undo Finalize
Initialize settings
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you
want to record more material or edit material already on
the disc.
You can initialize a DVD-RW disc for either VR mode
recording or Video mode recording. The first time you
load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically
initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto
Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see page 108).
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If
when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be
recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this
command to be able to record on the disc using this
recorder.
The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for
example if you want to change the recording format of
the disc. See Initializing a DVD-RW disc on page 60 for
detailed instructions.
1
From the Disc Setup menu, select ‘Finalize’, then
‘Undo Finalize’ from the finalize options.
HDD Initialize
2
Select ‘Start’.
HDD
Note
When your DVD recorder is working without a problem
this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.
• You cannot finalize a disc or use the Undo Finalize
command if the TV line system of the disc is different
to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line
System on page 98 for how to change the recorder’s
setting.
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for
some reason, you initialize the HDD to fix the problem.
Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it.
•
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.
Disc Setup
Basic
Initialize
Start
Initialize
Finalize
Initialize HDD
• Select ‘Start’ to initialize.
93
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
12
Chapter 12
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc
playback, and for recording.
4
Press ENTER to select the preset.
Setting the picture quality for TV and
external inputs
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings.
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality
settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external
input. There are several preset settings that suit various
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
Choosing a preset
Pr 5
1
With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU
Memory1
and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
Detailed Settings
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
the picture quality setting you want to adjust.
Timer Recording
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
Pr 5
Memory1
3-D Y/C
Motion
Off
Still
Disc History
PhotoViewer
Off
Off
VNR
DV Record
Detail
Max
White AGC
White Level
Black Level
Black Setup
DVR-520H/720H screen
Min
Min
Max
Max
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
0 IRE
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to
change the preset.
You can adjust the following settings:
Pr 5
• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour separation
(NTSC video only).
Tuner
Detailed Settings
• VNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction applied
to the video signal.
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
built-in TV tuner and the external inputs.
• White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to change the
adjustment.
channel of the built-in TV tuner.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
There are six presets available:
• Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts
• VCR – suitable for video cassettes
• LDP – suitable for Laserdiscs
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video only).
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset (Tuner, VCR or LDP).
94
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
12
4
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ(cursor left/right) buttons to adjust
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.
the currently selected picture quality setting.
5
When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
You can now use the preset for any other input or the
built-in TV tuner.
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2
Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed
Settings’.
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
Memory1
Detailed Settings
3
Select the picture quality setting you want to
Note
adjust.
• DVR-520H/720H only: When the DV input is selected,
only VNR and Detail settings can be adjusted.
Memory1
YNR
Off
Off
Off
Off
Min
Min
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
• When White AGC is On, the White Level setting
can’t be adjusted.
CNR
QNR
• The 3-D Y/C and Black Setup settings apply only to
Detail
NTSC video input.
White Level
Black Level
Black Setup
0 IRE
Setting the picture quality for disc
playback
You can adjust the following settings:
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
This setting determines how the picture will look when
playing discs.
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the C (colour) component.
• QNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the block noise.
Choosing a preset
1
With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video only).
change the setting.
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
TV(CRT)
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
Detailed Settings
appear.
There are six presets available:
4
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ(cursor left/right) buttons to adjust
the currently selected picture quality setting.
• TV(CRT) – suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs
• PDP – suitable for plasma display screens
• Professional – suitable for professional monitors
• Memory1 – user preset 1
5
When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
• Memory2 – user preset 2
Tip
• Memory3 – user preset 3
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset (TV(CRT), PDP or Professional).
4
Press ENTER to select the preset.
95
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
12
Note
• The Black Setup setting applies only when playing
NTSC discs.
Audio DRC
• Default setting: Off
When watching Dolby Digital material at low volume, it’s
easy to lose low level sounds completely—including
some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DRC (Dynamic
Range Control) can help by bringing up the low level
sounds, while controlling high level peaks.
1
During playback or when paused, press HOME
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2
3
Select ‘Audio Adjust’.
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ(cursor left/right) buttons to adjust
DRC from ‘Off‘ to ‘Max’.
Audio Adjust
Audio DRC
Off
Max
Exactly how much difference you can hear between the
settings will depend on the material.
Remember
• Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via
the digital output when Dolby Digital Out is set to
Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the dynamic range
from your AV amplifier/receiver.
96
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
Chapter 13
The Initial Setup menu
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
that broadcasts a clock signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
Using the Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various
recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.
Initial Setup
•
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.
Basic
Tuner
Clock
Auto Clock Setting
Input
Date
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On S
Time
Front
Powe
Pr 1
Clock Set CH
Remo
Setu
Start
Timer Recording
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
If the time could not be set automatically, press
RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select
Manual.
Disc History
PhotoViewer
DV Record
•
Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
DVR-520H/720H screen
signals, you can set the clock manually:
• Some settings can only be changed when the
recorder is stopped. During playback these settings
are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
Set your time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
to GMT.
• Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are
exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.
Initial Setup
Basic
Clock
Manual Clock Setting
1/2
Tuner
Input
England
London
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On S
Time Zone
Front
Powe
Basic settings
Off
Summer Time
Remo
Setup
Clock Setting
The date (day, month, year) and time must be set before
you can use any of the timer recording features.
Move the cursor down and select ‘On’ for
summer time if you are currently on summer
time, then press ENTER.
The clock can be set automatically if there is a broadcast
station transmitting clock signals, or manually.
Select Auto to set the clock automatically or Manual to
Initial Setup
display the clock setting screen.
Basic
Tuner
Clock
Input
1/2
Manual Clock Setting
England
London
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On S
Time Zone
Initial Setup
Front
Powe
On
Summer Time
Basic
Clock Setting
Auto
Manual
Remo
Tuner
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Setu
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
•
Auto clock setting
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the program. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.
97
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then
press ENTER to make all the settings.
On Screen Display
• Default setting: On
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
Manual Clock Setting
Clock
Basic
Tuner
2/2
Basic
Tuner
Clock Setting
On
Off
Input
On Sc
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Date
THU 01
01
00
2004
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Time
Front
00
Powe
Remo
England
London
Time Zone
Setup
On
Summer Time
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to change
On the default setting, the recorder shows on-screen
operation displays (Play, Stop and so on). Change to Off
to hide these displays.
the value in the highlighted field.
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to move
from one field to another.
Front Panel Display
• Default setting: On
Input Line System
• Default setting: 625System
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
Basic
Clock Setting
On
Tuner
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Off
Basic
Tuner
Clock Setting
525System
625System
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On the default setting, the time is shown in the front
panel display when the recorder is in standby. Switch to
Off to have the front panel display switch off completely
when in standby.
For standard PAL or SECAM recording, leave the input
line system to 625System. When recording an NTSC or
PAL–60 signal through an external input, change to
525System.
Note
Note
• When set to Off, the display still lights dimly in
standby when setting a timer recording, or during
Auto Start Recording.
• When the current input is a built-in tuner channel
preset, changing the input line system will usually
also affect the input line system of the AV2/AUTO
START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) input. However if
the AV2/L1 In setting is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1
In on page 102), then the L2 input is affected instead.
Power Save
• Default setting: Off
• If when this setting is changed, the screen goes
blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can
switch back by pressing and holding the front panel
+ button then pressing DVD (also front panel) while
the recorder is stopped.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Clock Setting
Mode1
Mode2
Off
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
• When you switch the Line Input System setting the
Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the
+ button and DVD buttons as described above, there
is no confirmation, so please use with care.
When set to Off, signals arriving at the ANTENNA IN
terminal and at the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/
DECODER) AV connector are passed through to the
ANTENNA OUT terminal and to the AV1(RGB)-TV AV
connector, respectively, when the recorder is in standby.
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems
on the same disc.
• When you change this setting, the Input Colour
System setting also changes (see Input Colour
System on page 102).
You can cut the standby power consumption of the
recorder by turning off the through function for one or
both terminals:
98
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
• Mode1 – Through function only for the antenna
terminal
Tuner settings
• Mode2 – No through function
• Off – Through function for both antenna terminal
and AV connector
Auto Channel Setting : Auto Scan
This recorder has a built-in TV tuner for recording PAL B/
G, PAL I, SECAM L and SECAM D/K TV programs off the
air or from analog cable TV. We recommend that you first
use the Auto Channel Setting described here to tune into
the channels in your area, then if there are any unwanted
channels, you can disable them using Channel Skip
(described below).
Note
• When a timer recording is set with VPS/PDC on,
SCART through is always active.
Remote Control Set
• Default setting: Recorder1
1
Choose ‘Tuner’ from the Initial Setup menu, then
‘Auto Channel Setting’, then ‘Auto Scan’.
You only need to set this if you are using more than one
Pioneer DVD recorder in the same room.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
Auto Scan
Download from TV
Initial Setup
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Basic
Tuner
Clock Setting
Recorder1
Recorder2
Recorder3
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
2
Select your country then press ENTER to start
tuning.
So that each remote control operates only its own
recorder, make this setting different for each recorder
and remote in the room.
Initial Setup
Basic
Auto Channel Setting
AutoC
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Manu
Chann
Set VID
There are three different recorder IDs. When set to
Recorder2 or Recorder3, the remote control mode is
shown in the front panel display.
Country
UK
After selecting a new recorder ID, you have to confirm the
change by selecting Yes or No (use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor
left/right) buttons), then pressing ENTER.
• You can cancel before auto tuning has finished by
Note that as soon as you change the recorder ID, the
remote becomes inoperative until you change the remote
to the same ID.
pressing ENTER again.
After auto scanning has finished, the channel mapping
screen appears showing which channels have been
assigned to which program numbers.
To set the remote, press and hold RETURN and a number
button (1, 2 or 3) until the indicator on the remote lights.
Initial Setup
Setup Navigator
1/7
Channel Mapping
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
System
CH Name
Pr
9
System
CH Name
• Default setting: n/a
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
26
33
23
30
37
35
39
26
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
25
11
12
13
14
15
16
Initial Setup
Basic
Clock Setting
Start
Tuner
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/next
page.
3
Press HOME MENU to exit this screen.
The Setup Navigator appears automatically when you
switch on the recorder for the first time (or after resetting
the recorder). It is also available from the Initial Settings
menu should you need it at any other time.
See also Switching on and setting up on page 25.
99
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
1
Select ‘Manual CH Setting’, then ‘Next Screen’.
Note
• You can fine-tune individual stations using the
Manual CH Setting feature. See Manual CH Setting
below for how to use this.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
Next Screen
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto Channel Setting : Download from TV
If you connected this recorder to your TV using the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector, and if your TV supports this
function, you can download all the channels that your TV
is tuned to. Check your TV’s instruction manual for more
details.
Press ENTER to go to the country setting screen.
2
Select your country.
1
2
3
Choose ‘Download from TV’.
Initial Setup
Manual Channel Setting
Auto C
Basic
Tuner
Chann
Manua
Initial Setup
Country
UK
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Set VID
Basic
Tuner
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
Auto Scan
Download from TV
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
3
Press ENTER to go to the manual channel setting
screen.
Select your country.
Pr 1
Skip
Off
UK & IE
2
Initial Setup
CH System
Channel
AFT
Auto Channel Setting
AutoCh
Basic
Tuner
Manua
Chann
Set VID
On
Country
UK
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Level
Sound System
Name
I
Decoder
Off
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons or the number
buttons to change channels.
Press ENTER to start downloading.
From this screen there are eight parameters you can set:
Downloading
Pr 5
• Skip – If you want to skip the displayed channel
(because there is no station assigned to that
channel), change the Skip setting to On.
Cancel
• CH System – Set the channel system used in your
area or region.
After downloading has finished, the channel mapping
screen appears showing which channels have been
assigned to which program numbers.
• Channel – Change the channel number assigned to
the current preset.
• AFT (Auto Fine Tune) – When set to On, the station is
automatically tuned; set to Off to manually fine tune
(see below).
Tip
• If the channel tuning information is updated in the
TV, the recorder will automatically download the new
information.
• Level – Set the AFT level (see above).
• Sound System – Set the sound system used for the
current channel.
Manual CH Setting
• Name – Move the cursor right then input a name for
the current station, (up to five characters) then press
ENTER.
The channel skip function lets you skip channels where
there is no station so that as you change channels using
the CHANNEL +/– buttons or the number buttons, you
only change to channels that have a station.
• Decoder – If the current channel is scrambled,
requiring a decoder connected to the AV2/AUTO
START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector, set this
to On. (See also AV2/L1 In on page 102.)
The manual tuning function allows you to manually tune
to stations, should you need to.
100
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
5
6
Press ENTER to swap the presets.
Channel Swapping
The preset swap feature lets you swap the channel
assignments of different programs. This is so that you
can group together station presets which naturally go
together.
If you want to swap more presets, press ꢄ
(cursor left), then repeats steps 3 to 5.
7
Press HOME MENU to finish and exit.
1
Select ‘Channel Swapping’.
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
• Default setting: n/a
Initial Setup
Guide channels are used by the VIDEO Plus+ system so
that the channel number specified in the PlusCode
programming numbers can be guaranteed to
correspond to the correct station.
Basic
Tuner
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
Next Screen
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
1
Select ‘Set VIDEO Plus+ CH’, then ‘Next Screen’.
2
Select ‘Next Screen’ to go to the swap presets
Initial Setup
screen.
Basic
Tuner
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
Next Screen
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Initial Setup
[1]
1/17
CH Name
[2]
1/17
CH Name
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
I
I
I
I
I
I
CC40
I
I
I
I
I
I
CC40
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
Assign channel numbers to the guide channels as
necessary.
Look in your TV guide to see which channel numbers
1
1
Swap Preset
should be assigned to which guide channels.
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
Initial Setup
a preset station to swap.
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
1/26
Auto C
• Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/
next page.
Basic
Tuner
Guide Preset
Manua
Guide Preset
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Chann
Set VID
2
Pr 4
1
6
7
3
4
5
8
9
10
Initial Setup
[1]
1/17
[2]
1/17
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
CH Name
CC40
2
3
4
5
6
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
CH Name
CC40
2
3
4
5
6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to change
the guide channel for setting.
• Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to change
the channel number.
5
1
Swap Preset
• Use the PREV / NEXT button to display the previous/
next 10 guide channels.
4
Press ꢅ (cursor right), then select a preset
station to swap with the first preset.
3
To return to the Initial Setup menu, press ENTER.
Initial Setup
[1]
1/17
[2]
1/17
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
CH Name
CC40
2
3
4
5
6
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
CH Name
CC40
2
3
4
5
6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5
3
Swap Preset
101
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
Video In / Out settings
13
AV1 Out
• Default setting: Video
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to your TV using the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART AV
connector.
Input Colour System
• Default setting: Auto
Important
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Input Colour System
AV1 Out
AV2/L1 In
Next Screen
• If you make a setting here that is incompatible with
your TV, the TV may not display any picture at all. If
this happens either switch everything off and
reconnect to the TV using either the supplied video
cable, or an S-video cable (see Using the S-video
output on page 15 for more on this), or reset the
recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 112 for
how to do this).
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
NTSC on PAL TV
On the default setting, the recorder automatically detects
whether the video signal from the built-in tuner or from
one of the external inputs is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or
PAL–60. You may, however, occasionally need to set it
manually if the picture is not displayed properly.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Input Colour System
AV1 Out
AV2/L1 In
Video
S-Video
RGB
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
1
Select ‘Input Colour System’, then ‘Next Screen’.
NTSC on PAL TV
2
Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons or the INPUT
SELECT button to switch between the built-in tuner
and the external inputs.
• Video – Compatible with all TVs, but lowest quality of
the three AV settings.
3
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to
change the input colour system for the current input
or built-in tuner.
• S-Video – Almost the same quality as RGB, but can
give better results if you are using a long SCART
cable.
Pr 5
• RGB – If your TV is compatible, this setting gives the
Auto
best picture quality.
• The available settings depend on the Input Line
System setting (see Input Line System on page 98).
The table below shows the different options available.
AV2/L1 In
• Default setting: Video
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to another component using the AV2/AUTO
START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector.
Input Line System Built-in tuner External input
625 System
525 System
Auto
PAL
Auto
Initial Setup
PAL
Basic
Tuner
Input Colour System
AV1 Out
AV2/L1 In
Video
S-Video
RGB
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
SECAM
n/a
SECAM
Auto
NTSC on PAL TV
Decoder
3.58 NTSC
PAL–60
The AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER)
connector input can be set to one of the following
settings:
• Video – Sets the input signal type to composite
video.
• S-Video – Sets the input signal type to S-video.
• RGB – Sets the input signal type to RGB video.
102
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
• Decoder – Use this setting if you are using a decoder
connected to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/
DECODER) input. (For scrambled channels, make
sure that the manual channel Decoder setting is set
to On—see also Manual CH Setting on page 100).
Note that on this setting, it is not possible to use Auto
Start Recording.
Audio In settings
NICAM Select
• Default setting: NICAM
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
NICAM
Regular Audio
Note
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
• When the Input Line System setting is set to 525
System, RGB can’t be selected.
• When the Input Line System setting is set to 625
System, RGB can be selected, but if the Input Line
System is then changed to 525 System, the AV2/L1
In setting automatically changes to Video.
If you want to record the non-NICAM audio in a TV
broadcast, select Regular Audio, otherwise set to
NICAM. (When set to NICAM, you can still select
Regular Audio using the AUDIO button. See Changing
audio channels on page 29.)
• See also Input Line System on page 98.
NTSC on PAL TV
• Default setting: On
Tuner Level
• Default setting: Normal
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Input Colour System
AV1 Out
On
Off
Initial Setup
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
AV2/L1 In
NTSC on PAL TV
Basic
Tuner
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Normal
Compression
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
When set to On, NTSC discs (from the U.S., for example)
will play correctly on a PAL-only TV. Change to Off if your
TV is already NTSC-compatible.
Set to Compression if the audio level from the built-in
tuner is excessively high causing distortion.
Depending on this setting and the Input Line System
setting (see Input Line System on page 98), the signal
format output when the recorder is stopped varies as
shown in the table below.
External Audio
• Default setting: Stereo
Initial Setup
NTSC on PAL
TV
Output when
stopped
Input Line System
625 System
Basic
Tuner
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Stereo
Bilingual
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Off
On
Off
On
PAL
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
PAL
525 System
NTSC
PAL–60
If the external source is standard stereo, leave set to
Stereo. If each channel carries a separate soundtrack,
change to Bilingual.
DVR-520H/720H only: When the external audio is from
the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV
audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or
bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.
Note
• Many recent PAL TVs are capable of correctly
displaying NTSC pictures without the need for this
setting. Check the manual that came with your TV if
you’re not sure whether yours has this feature.
103
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
You can adjust the gain of the audio from each external
input individually, from –6dB to +6dB in steps of 3 dB to
optimize the recorded audio level.
Bilingual Recording
• Default setting: A/L
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
A/L
B/R
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Audio Out settings
Digital Out
• Default setting: On
When recording a bilingual source from an external input
in Video mode or VR mode set to FINE/MN32, or to the
HDD, you can choose to record either the A/L (left), or
the B/R (right) audio channel.
Initial Setup
Basic
Digital Out
On
Off
Tuner
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Note
• If you’re recording in VR mode (except when set to
FINE/MN32), both channels will be recorded and you
can switch them as you like on playback.
If at any time you need to switch off the digital audio
output, set this to Off, otherwise leave it On.
DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only)
• Default setting: Stereo1
Note
You need to set this if you have a camcorder using 32kHz/
12-bit sound connected to the front panel DV IN/OUT jack.
• When set to Off, all the other Audio Out settings are
grayed out and can’t be set.
Initial Setup
Dolby Digital Out
Basic
Tuner
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Stereo1
Stereo2
Mix (Stereo1: 75%)
Mix (Stereo1: 50%)
Mix (Stereo1: 25%)
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using
the digital output.
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
• Default setting: Dolby Digital
Initial Setup
Some digital camcorders have two stereo tracks for
audio. One is recorded at the time of shooting; the other
is for overdubbing after shooting.
Basic
Tuner
Digital Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital ꢁ PCM
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On the Stereo1 setting, the sound that was recorded
while shooting is used. On the Stereo2 setting, the
overdubbed sound is used. You can also choose a Mix
setting of 25%, 50% or 75% for the Stereo 1 with a
corresponding Stereo 2 setting of 75%, 50% or 25%.
If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)
is Dolby Digital compatible, set to Dolby Digital,
otherwise set to Dolby Digital ꢁ PCM. Check the
manual that came with the connected component if
you’re unsure whether it is Dolby Digital compatible.
Input Level (L1 / L2)
• Default setting: 0dB
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
+6dB
+3dB
0dB
–3dB
–6dB
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
104
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
DTS Out
MPEG Out
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using
the digital output.
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using
the digital output.
• Default setting: On
• Default setting: MPEG ꢁ PCM
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
Basic
Digital Out
Basic
Digital Out
On
MPEG
Tuner
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
Tuner
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
Off
MPEG ꢁ PCM
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)
has a built-in DTS decoder, set to On, otherwise set to
Off. Check the manual that came with the connected
component if you’re unsure whether it is DTS
compatible.
If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)
is MPEG audio compatible, set to MPEG, otherwise set to
MPEG ꢁ PCM. Check the manual that came with the
connected component if you’re unsure whether it is
MPEG compatible.
Important
• If you set to On with a non-DTS compatible amp/
receiver, noise will be output when you play a DTS
disc.
Language settings
OSD Language
• Default setting: English
• When set to On, there is no analog audio output
when playing a DTS DVD-Video disc.
• When playing a DTS audio CD (even when DTS Out
is Off), noise is output from the analog outputs. Do
not play this through your amplifier and speakers.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
OSD Language
English
Français
Deutsch
Italiano
Español
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
• When playing a DTS audio CD, make sure that
Stereo is selected using the AUDIO button. See
Switching audio channels on page 44.
96kHz PCM Out
This sets the language of the on-screen menus and
displays.
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using
the digital output.
Audio Language
• Default setting: English
• Default setting: 96kHz ꢁ 48kHz
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Digital Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
96kHz ꢁ 48kHz
96kHz
Basic
Tuner
OSD Language
English
French
German
Italian
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Spanish
Other
If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)
is compatible with high sampling rate audio (88.2 / 96
kHz), set to 96kHz, otherwise set to 96kHz ꢁ 48kHz.
Check the manual that came with the connected
component if you’re unsure whether it is compatible with
high sampling rate audio.
This setting is your preferred audio language for DVD
discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a
disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc in that
language (although this depends on the Auto Language
setting—see Auto Language on page 106).
105
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
Choose Other if you want to specify a language other
than those listed (see Selecting ‘Other’ languages on
page 107).
Set to Off to have the recorder play discs strictly
according to your Audio Language and Subtitle
Language settings.
For Auto Language to work, the Audio Language and
Subtitle Language settings must be the same—see
Audio Language on page 105 and Subtitle Language
above.
Tip
• You can switch between the languages recorded on
a DVD disc any time during playback using the
AUDIO button. (This does not affect this setting.)
Note
• Even when set to On, Auto Language may not work
with some discs. In this case, set the audio and
subtitle languages using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE
buttons.
Subtitle Language
• Default setting: English
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
OSD Language
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Other
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Tip
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
• You can still switch audio and subtitle languages on
playback using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE buttons.
DVD Menu Language
This setting is your preferred subtitle language for DVD
discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a
disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc with those
subtitles (although this depends on the Auto Language
setting—see Auto Language below).
• Default setting: w/Subtitle Language
Initial Setup
Basic
OSD Language
w/Subtitle Language
English
French
German
Italian
Tuner
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Choose Other if you want to specify a language other
than those listed (see Selecting ‘Other’ languages on
page 107).
Spanish
Other
Tip
Some multilingual discs have disc menus in several
languages. This setting specifies in which language the
disc menus should appear. Leave on the default setting
for menus to appear in the same language as your
Subtitle Language—see Subtitle Language above.
• You can change or switch off the subtitles on a DVD
disc any time during playback using the SUBTITLE
button. (This does not affect this setting.)
Choose Other if you want to specify a language other
than those listed (see Selecting ‘Other’ languages on
page 107).
Auto Language
• Default setting: On
Initial Setup
Basic
OSD Language
On
Tuner
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
When set to On, the recorder selects the default audio
language on a DVD disc (French dialog for a French
movie, for example), and displays subtitles in your
preferred subtitle language only if that is set to
something different. In other words, movies in your native
language won’t have any subtitles, while foreign
language movies will be shown with subtitles.
106
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
Subtitle Display
• Default setting: On
Recording settings
Initial Setup
Manual Recording
Basic
Tuner
OSD Language
On
Off
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
• Default setting: Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Assist Subtitle
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
On (go to setup)
Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
When set to On, the recorder displays subtitles
according to the Subtitle Language and Auto
Language settings. Set to Off to switch subtitles off
altogether (although you may find that some discs
override this setting). Set to Assist Subtitle to have the
recorder display the extra assistive subtitles recorded on
to some DVD discs.
On the default setting there are four different recording
time/picture quality settings, FINE, SP, LP and EP. If you
want to create a custom setting, switch on Manual
Recording and select one of the 32 manual settings.
When recording, you can select your Manual Recording
setting using the REC MODE button.
Selecting ‘Other’ languages
1
Select ‘Other’ from the language list.
1
Select ‘On (go to setup)’ to display the manual
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu
recording setting screen.
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.
Pr 5
DVD Remain 2h00m
2
Select the language you want.
HDD Remain 30h33m
EP
LP
SP
FINE
Initial Setup
DVD Menu Language
OSD La
Basic
Tuner
MN 9(4h00m/DVD) 2.60Mbps
Preview
Audio
Subtitl
Language
English
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto L
DVD M
Subtitl
Number
0
5
1
4
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to
change the manual recording level.
• You can also use the ꢍ and ꢎ buttons to cycle
between levels MN1, MN9, MN21 and MN32.
• Select by language name: Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/
• To preview the recording quality, press ꢃ (cursor
down) and select Preview. To return to the level
adjust screen, press ENTER.
right) buttons to change the language.
• Select by code number: Press ꢃ (cursor down) then
use the number buttons to enter the four-digit
language code.
3
Press ENTER to set the manual recording level
and return to the menu screen.
See Language code list on page 119 for a list of available
languages and corresponding codes.
Note
3
Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen.
• The preset picture quality settings correspond to the
following manual settings: FINE: MN32, SP: MN21,
LP: MN9, EP: MN1.
• See Manual recording modes on page 118 for
detailed information on the manual recording levels.
107
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
Optimized Rec
• Default setting: Off
Auto Chapter (Video)
• Default setting: 10 minutes
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
Basic
Tuner
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
On
Off
No Separation
10 minutes
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Navi Mark
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Navi Mark
15 minutes
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
On the default setting, if a timer program (standard, easy
or VIDEO Plus+ programming system) is set but there
isn’t enough space on the disc at the recording quality
set, the recording will start, but it will be cut off when the
disc is full. Set Optimized Rec to On to have the recorder
automatically adjust the recording quality to fit the
available disc space.
When recording in Video mode, a new chapter is started
every 10 minutes on the default setting. You can change
this interval to 15 minutes, or switch off automatic
chapter marking altogether with the No Separation
setting.
Frame Accurate
• Default setting: Off
Note
Initial Setup
• You may notice a reduction in picture quality if the
recorder has to fit a lot of extra material into the
remaining time available on the disc.
Basic
Tuner
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
On
Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
• If, even on recording level MN 1, there is insufficient
space available on the disc, the recording is made on
the HDD at the quality setting you originally
specified.
When Frame Accurate setting is Off, exact frame
accuracy is traded for high-speed copying when
recording a Copy List. Switch Frame Accurate On to
preserve the accuracy of the Copy List. However, copying
some edited Video mode titles will be done in real time.
• Optimized Recording only compensates for the first
(earliest starting) timer program if more than one has
been set.
• Optimized recording works only with DVD
recordings.
• Optimized recording can’t be used together with
VPS/PDC.
Important
• When you change this setting the Copy List is erased.
Make sure it is set how you want it before you start
putting together a Copy List.
Navi Mark
• Default setting: 0 seconds
• The Frame Accurate setting has no effect on the
actual video content stored on the HDD.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
0 seconds
30 seconds
3 minutes
DVD-RW Auto Init.
• Default setting: VR Mode
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc the recorder
automatically initializes it for recording. You can set it to
initialize the disc for VR mode or Video mode recording.
In the Disc Navigator, each title is shown with a still
frame picture to remind you what it is. This setting lets
you decide the default still frame. The default setting of 0
seconds takes the first frame of the title, but you can also
set it to 30 seconds or 3 minutes into the title (if the title
is shorter than the setting, then the first frame is used).
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
VR Mode
Video Mode
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
108
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
Playback settings
13
Seamless Playback
VR mode
HDD
• Default setting: Off
TV Screen Size
During playback of a VR mode Play List, you may notice
momentary interruption in the picture at edited points.
The Seamless Playback feature lets you trade-off
accuracy of the edit points for more seamless playback.
When switched On, you may notice that the edit points
are a few frames earlier or later than you set.
• Default setting: 4:3 (Letter Box)
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
16:9
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
On
Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
If you have a widescreen TV, select the 16:9 setting—
widescreen DVD software is then shown using the full
screen area. When playing software recorded in
conventional (4:3) format, the settings on your TV will
determine how the material is presented—see the
manual that came with your TV for details on what
options are available.
Parental Lock
• Default level: Off
If you have a conventional TV, choose either 4:3 (Letter
Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan). In Letter Box mode,
• Default password: none
• Default Country code: us (2119)
widescreen software is shown with black bars at the top
and bottom of the screen. Pan & Scan chops the sides off
widescreen material to make it fit the 4:3 screen (so even
though the picture looks larger on the screen, you’re
actually seeing less of the movie). See Screen sizes and
disc formats on page 113 for more information.
Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If
the recorder is set to a lower level than the disc, it will
require you to enter a password before the disc will play.
This gives you some control about what your children
watch on your DVD recorder.
Some discs also support the Country code feature. The
recorder does not play certain scenes on these discs
depending on the Country code you set.
Still Picture
• Default setting: Auto
Before you can set the Parental Lock level or the Country
code you must set a password. As the password owner
you can change the Parental Lock level or Country code
whenever you like. You can also change the password.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Field
Frame
Auto
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Note
• Not all discs that you may consider inappropriate for
your children use the Parental Lock feature. These
discs will always play without requiring the password
first.
The recorder uses one of two processes when displaying
a still frame from a DVD disc. The default Auto setting
automatically chooses the best setting each time.
• If you forget the password, you can reset the recorder
to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on
page 112), then set a new password.
• Field – produces a stable, generally shake-free
image.
• Frame – produces a sharper image, but more prone
to shake than field stills.
Parental Lock : Set Password
The password you set will enable you to change the
Parental Lock level and Country code setting. It is also the
password that you will need to enter if you want to play a
disc with a parental lock level higher than the recorder.
109
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
1
Select ‘Set Password’.
5
Press ENTER.
Initial Setup
Parental Lock : Change Level
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Set Password
Change Level
Country Code
1
Select ‘Change Level’.
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Change Password
Change Level
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Country Code
2
Use the number buttons to input a four-digit
password.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
2
Use number buttons to enter your password,
Set Password
TV Sc
Still P
Seam
Paren
Angle
then press ENTER.
1
2
3
4
Initial Setup
TV ScParental Lock : Change Level
Basic
Still P
Seam
Paren
Angle
Tuner
1
2
3
4
Password
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
3
Press ENTER to set the password.
Off
Parental Lock : Change Password
To change your password, confirm your existing
password then enter a new one.
3
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a new parental lock level.
1
Select ‘Change Password’.
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
Parental Lock : Change Level
TV Sc
Basic
Tuner
Still P
Seam
Paren
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
1
Change Password
Change Level
Country Code
2
3
4
Password
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Angle
Off
4
Press ENTER to set the new Parental Lock level.
2
Use the number buttons to enter your existing
password.
Parental Lock : Country Code
You may also want to refer to the Country code list on
page 119.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
TV Sc
Still P
Seam
C
h
a
n
ge Password
1
Select ‘Country Code’.
Current Password
1
2
3
4
Paren
Angle
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
New Password
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Change Password
Change Level
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Country Code
3
4
Press ENTER.
Enter a new password.
Initial Setup
Change Password
TV Sc
Still P
Basic
Tuner
Seam
Paren
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Current Password
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
Angle
New Password
110
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
13
2
Use number buttons to enter your password,
On the default setting, when playing a DVD-Video disc
that features multi-angle scenes, an icon appears on-
screen during the parts of the disc where angle switching
is available. Change to Off to hide the on-screen
indicator.
then press ENTER.
Initial Setup
Basic
Parental Lock: Country Code
TV Sc
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Still P
Seam
Paren
Angle
1
2
3
4
9
Password
us
Code
2
1
1
Number
3
Select a Country code.
There are two ways you can do this.
• Select by code letter: Use ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) to
change the country code.
Initial Setup
Parental Lock: Country Code
TV Sc
Basic
Tuner
Still P
Seam
Paren
1
2
3
4
9
Password
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Angle
us
Code
Number
2
1
1
• Select by code number: Press ꢃ (cursor down) then
use the number buttons to enter the four-digit
country code (you can find the Country code list on
page 119.)
Initial Setup
Parental Lock: Country Code
TV Sc
Basic
Still P
Seam
Paren
Tuner
1
2
3
4
9
Password
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Angle
us
Code
2
1
1
Number
4
Press ENTER to set the new Country code.
Note
• Changing the country code does not take effect until
the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is
reloaded).
Angle Indicator
• Default setting: On
Initial Setup
Basic
TV Screen Size
On
Tuner
Still Picture
Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
111
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
14
Chapter 14
Additional information
Maker
Code
66
Resetting the recorder
Alba
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings.
Bush
76
Finlux
84
1
Make sure that the recorder is on.
Fisher
61, 65
77
2
ON.
Press and hold ꢅ STOP and press ꢃ STANDBY/
Fujitsu
Funai
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
67
Goldstar
Grandiente
Grundig
Hitachi
ITT
79
87
Setting up the remote to control your
TV
51, 82
56, 60, 83, 86
70
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be
able to use this feature you first have to program the
remote with a maker code from the table below.
1
Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then
Mitsubishi
Nokia
59
enter the maker code for your TV.
The LED indicator on the remote controls lights.
53, 81
58, 72
57, 85
50, 80
68
See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is
more than one code given for your make, input the first
one in the list.
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
RCA
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the
table below, you will not be able to use this remote to
control your TV.
Salora
Samsung
Sanyo
71
2
Press ꢃ TV to check that the remote works with
your TV.
73, 75
74
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/
off. If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your
maker, repeat step 1 with a new code.
Sei
78
Sharp
52
Using the TV remote control buttons
The table below shows how to use this remote control
with your TV.
Sony
54
Tandy
69
Button
What it does
Telefunken
Thomson
Toshiba
Victor
64
ꢃ TV
Press to switch the TV on/off (standby)
62
INPUT SELECT Press to change the TV’s video input
TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume
TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels
55
63
112
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
14
Screen sizes and disc formats
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting
Appearance
16:9
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
16:9
The program is shown in
widescreen with black bars at
the top and bottom of the
screen.
The sides of the program are
cropped so that the picture
fills the whole screen.
4:3
The program appears
squashed. Set to either 4:3
(Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan &
Scan).
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The program is presented
correctly on either setting.
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting
Appearance
16:9
16:9
The program is presented in
widescreen.
4:3
16:9
Your TV will determine how the
picture is presented—check
the manual that came with the
TV for details.
113
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Troubleshooting
14
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the
other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the
points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
General
Problem
Remedy
The disc is automatically ejected
after closing the disc tray
• Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD+R/RW or other incompatible format
disc (page 9).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 121).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 123).
No picture
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 12).
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct
input.
Can’t play a disc
• Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD+R/RW or other incompatible format
disc (page 9).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 121).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so
for the condensation to evaporate.
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System
different to the current recorder setting.
All settings are reset
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on,
all the settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the
power cord.
Screen goes blank and controls are • Press ꢅ STOP then restart playback.
inoperative
Remote control does not work
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the CONTROL
IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 12).
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 99). (When
the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.)
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 8).
• Replace the batteries (page 8).
No sound or sound is distorted
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume
turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow
motion play. Press ꢄ PLAY to resume regular playback.
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or
DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a suitable decoder, also make
sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Output setting is On.
• Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case,
switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.
• Check the audio cable connections (page 12).
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
The picture from the external input • If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot
is distorted
connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.
114
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
14
Problem
Remedy
The picture is distorted
• Change the Input Line System setting (page 98). (You can also change it by
pressing the + button and DVD on the front panel simultaneously with the
recorder stopped.)
Screen is stretched vertically or hori- • Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 109) is correct for the kind of TV
zontally
you have (see also page 113).
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the
input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1
(widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio
(standard) video.
Can’t play a disc recorded using this • If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that it’s finalized (page 59).
recorder on another player
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video
mode and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW
compatible in order to play it (page 9).
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM
compatible players (page 46).
During playback the picture is dark • When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display
or distorted
correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Can’t control your TV using this
remote control
• If there is more than one code listed for your make of TV, try each one in turn
(page 112).
• It is possible that none of the codes listed will work with your particular model of
TV, even if the maker appears in the remote control code list.
Can’t record or does not record suc- • Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.
cessfully
• For a Video mode disc, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.
• The HDD may contain up to 250 titles; one DVD disc 99 (Original) titles and 999
chapters. Check that these limits have not been reached.
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 92).
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the
disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV
system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line
System setting to match what you want to record (page 98).
• The power may have failed during recording.
Timer program doesn’t record suc- • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV
cessfully
tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected
cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material
(page 46).
• Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will
record completely.
• The power may have failed during recording.
After briefly unplugging or after a • A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from
power failure the front panel dis-
play shows ‘--:--’
being reset when there is no power to the recorder. This battery should last
approximately five years from factory shipping.
Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. To have the
battery replaced, contact your dealer or a Pioneer Service Center.
Front panel display shows ‘LOCK’
when a button is pressed
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 55).
115
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
14
Problem
Remedy
Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD to • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD loaded with some free space for
DVD)
recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a
Video mode disc, the disc isn’t finalized.
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One
Touch Copy will not work.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.
Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD to • Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than
HDD)
250 titles on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.
The picture freezes and the front
panel and remote control buttons
stop working
• Press the front panel ꢃ STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then
switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold
ꢃ STANDBY/ON for 10 seconds until the power switches off.
Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
high-speed copy). Alternatively, you could copy the
material in SP (or Optimized) so as to fit it all on to one
disc (note that there will be some loss in picture
In this section you can find answers to frequently asked
quality if you do this).
Frequently asked questions
questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it
can do.
See also Copying and back-up on page 61.
• How do I make a high-quality copy?
• Can I record a bilingual broadcast to the HDD, keeping
both audio channels and switch them on playback?
We recommend that you use the high-speed copy
mode. Although the copy is faster than real time,
there is no loss of picture or sound quality compared
to the original.
No. Only the audio channel set in the Bilingual
Recording setting in the Initial Settings menu will be
recorded. If you need to record both channels of
audio, please record using a VR mode DVD-RW disc.
If there is not enough space on the disc to make a
copy at the same picture quality as the original, we
recommend that you change the recording mode to
‘Optimized’. This will fit the recording on to the
available space on the disc.
See also Bilingual Recording on page 104.
• Can I record continuously on the HDD for more than
six hours?
See also Copying and back-up on page 61.
Yes, timer recordings made to the HDD can by set for
up to 24 hours. However, because the maximum
length of a title is six hours, the recording will be
spread over two or more titles. Note that there will be
a short break in the recording between titles.
• Can I make a DVD copy of, say, a movie that has had
the commercials edited out?
Yes. There are two ways to do this. You can either edit
the video on the HDD then copy the edited version to
DVD, or you can assemble a Copy List that cuts out
the commercials, then record that to DVD.
See also Setting a timer recording on page 49.
See also Copying and back-up on page 61.
• Can I copy a finalized Video mode disc (DVD-R or DVD-
RW) to the HDD?
• I have a two-hour recording on the HDD made in FINE
mode. Can I copy this to DVD in high-speed mode?
Yes. Start playing the Video mode disc and use the
One Touch Copy button to copy the currently playing
title to the HDD. Repeat for as many titles on the disc
as you want to copy.
A standard DVD disc can hold only an hour of FINE
mode material, so you wouldn’t be able to make a
high-speed copy of this on to one disc. You could
divide up the recording on the HDD into two titles of
an hour each and copy these to two DVDs (using
See also One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) on page 62.
116
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
14
• Can I use high-speed copy to copy from DVD to HDD?
• Audio output from the DV IN/OUT jack is 16-bit only.
You can only use high-speed copy from DVD to HDD
when copying Original titles from a VR mode DVD-
RW.
• Audio input to the DV IN/OUT jack should be 32 or
48kHz (not 44.1kHz).
• Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the
source component pauses playback or plays an
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable becomes
disconnected.
See also Copying from DVD to HDD* on page 71.
• Can I copy a copy-once protected program from a
subscription satellite or cable channel to a DVD from
the HDD?
DV-related messages
You may see the following messages appear on your TV
screen when using the DV IN/OUT jack.
Yes, you can use high-speed copy to copy to a VR
mode DVD-RW disc. You can also divide the
recording on the HDD into a number of smaller titles
if the whole recording won’t fit on to one disc.
• No DV camcorder connected. – The camcorder is
not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched
off.
See also Copying from HDD to DVD* on page 63.
• The DV camcorder is recording. – The camcorder is
recording, so you cannot start recording from the
camcorder to this recorder.
• Can I play a DVD I recorded on this recorder on another
DVD player?
Yes, you can generally play DVD-R discs and Video
mode DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder on
any standard DVD player. You may find, however, that
some players will not play some recordable media.
• You cannot connect more than one DV
camcorder at the same time. – The DV jack on this
recorder supports connection to just one camcorder.
• No tape in the DV camcorder. – There is no
cassette loaded into the connected equipment.
For VR mode DVD-RW discs, look for the ‘RW
Compatible’ mark to see if it will play the disc.
• The DV camcorder is in record-pause mode. – The
camcorder is in record-pause mode.
• DV camcorder playback canceled.
Recording has been paused. – Recording was
paused because the camcorder is not in playback
mode.
About DV (DVR-520H/720H only)
Using DV, also known as i.LINK, you can connect a DV-
equipped camcorder to this recorder using a single DV
cable for input and output of audio, video, data and
control signals.
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder. – This recorder
cannot control the camcorder. Try switching off the
camcorder then switching it back on.
The i.LINK interface is also known as IEEE 1394-1995.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.
• Could not operate the DV camcorder. – This
recorder was not able to control the camcorder.
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite tuners and
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.
• Recording has stopped because the recorded
material on the tape finished. – When the recorded
part of the DV tape comes to an end, this recorder
automatically stops recording.
• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at
a time to this recorder.
• Recording has stopped because DV camcorder
playback stopped. – Recording stopped because
DV camcorder playback was stopped or the
camcorder was disconnected.
• You cannot control this recorder from external
equipment connected via the DV IN/OUT jack.
• It may not always be possible to control the
connected camcorder via the DV IN/OUT jack.
• The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please
select playback mode on the DV camcorder. – The
camcorder is in camera mode.
• This recorder only outputs HDD/DVD playback video
from the DV IN/OUT jack; signals from the built-in TV
tuner, CD, Video CD and other inputs are not output.
• Copy-protected or copy-once video is not output from
the DV IN/OUT jack.
• Digital camcorders can usually record audio as
stereo 16-bit/48kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/
32kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo
audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see
DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104).
117
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Manual recording modes
14
The table below shows the approximate recording times
for all of the 32 manual recording modes, as well as the
standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated
by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in
picture quality. The divisions for HDD recording are the
same as those for Video mode.
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in
Dolby Digital 2ch format, except for MN32 which is in
Linear PCM format.
Video mode /
VR mode
HDD
Level
Rec. time
Level
Rec. time
MN 1
MN 2
MN 3
MN 4
MN 5
MN 6
MN 7
MN 8
360 mins.
345 mins.
330 mins.
315 mins.
300 mins.
285 mins.
270 mins.
255 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
EP
MN 1
MN 2
MN 3
MN 4
MN 5
MN 6
MN 7
MN 8
360 mins.
345 mins.
330 mins.
315 mins.
300 mins.
285 mins.
270 mins.
255 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
MN 9
LP
MN 9
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
MN 32
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
SP
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins. FINE MN 32
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins.
118
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
14
Language code list
Language (Language code letter), Language code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Spanish (es), 0519
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Korean (ko), 1115
Greek (el), 0512
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Laothian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Irish (ga), 0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Afar (aa), 0101
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Byelorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Czech (cs), 0319
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Sangho (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Country code list
Country, Country code, Country code letter
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Japan, 1016, jp
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
China, 0314, cn
Denmark, 0411, dk
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr
Russian Federation, 1821, ru
119
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
14
On-screen displays and recorder displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation
of their meaning.
Message
Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.
When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically
initializes it.
• Incompatible region number.
The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the
recorder and so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles.
• No more space for file management data.
• Cannot add any more chapter marks.
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum
number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/
chapters or combine chapters.
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the final-
ization.
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the
finalization in order to recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc.
• This disc cannot be recorded.
• Cannot read the CPRM information.
• Could not record the information to the disc.
• Cannot edit.
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and
retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even
with a new disc, please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization successfully.
• Could not undo finalization successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.
The disc loaded is a DVD-RAM, DVD+R/RW or some other
incompatible disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is
dirty or damaged.
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM com-
patible.
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-RW
disc with CPRM for recording.
• Cannot record this content using Video mode
recording.
• This content is copy protected.
• Incorrect CPRM information.
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.
The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder
may be damaged—please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• The audio will conform to the [Bilingual
Recording] setting.
When recording from an external input in Video mode, or in VR
mode set to MN 32, audio is recorded in Linear PCM format. You
can only record the left or right channel; not both.
• Repairing disc.
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when
the power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc.
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The
contents of the recording will be lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation.
Press DISPLAY to clear this message.
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the
operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a
Pioneer authorized service center.
120
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
14
Message
Explanation/Action
• There is no DV input or the input signal is unre- No signal was detected at the DV input/output jack. This may
cordable.
appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected
camcorder. (Applicable to DVR-520H/720H only.)
• Cannot preview because there is no DV input
or the input signal is unrecordable.
• This channel’s TV system is different from the
recorder’s setting.
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different
from the TV system settings of this recorder.
• Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel
Press DISPLAY to clear message. set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder.
• Playback has stopped because the TV system is During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL,
different than the recording.
NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to
stop automatically.
Handling discs
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.
For more detailed care information see the instructions
that come with discs.
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and
Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc
becoming unusable.
Damaged discs
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly
from the center to the outside edge as shown in the
diagram below.
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can
see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise
damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging
the recorder.
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped
discs.
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or
other cleaning agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.
Storing discs
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl
records, you should still take care to handle and store
discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including
under direct sunlight).
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing
instrument. These could all damage the disc.
121
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Cleaning the pickup lens
14
Moving the recorder
The DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-
authorized service center. Although lens cleaners for CD
players are commercially available, we do not re-
commend using them since some may damage the lens.
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if
there’s one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press ꢃ
STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking
that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off.
Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power
cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or
recording—discs rotate at a high speed and may be
damaged.
Condensation
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for
about an hour before switching on and using.
Glossary
Analog audio
An electrical signal that directly represents sound.
Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical
signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See
also Digital audio.
Aspect ratio
Hints on installation
The width of a TV screen relative to its height.
Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is
almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen
is almost twice as wide as it is high).
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so
please bear in mind the following points when choosing
a suitable location for it:
Do...
Chapter
ꢆ
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on
the HDD/a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See
also Title.
ꢆ
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,
shelf or stereo rack.
Don’t...
Digital audio
ꢇ
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or
An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During
recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals
(44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to-
digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On
playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an
analog signal based on these numbers. See also
Sampling frequency and Analog audio.
humidity, including near radiators and other heat-
generating appliances.
ꢇ
Place on a window sill or other place where the
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other
ꢇ
ꢇ
Dolby Digital
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in
use.
1
With multichannel audio, this high quality surround
system is used in many movie theaters around the world.
ꢇ
Use near a television or monitor as you may
experience interference—especially if the television uses
an indoor antenna.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
ꢇ
Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder
may be exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this
may prevent proper cooling of the unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.
ꢇ
ꢇ
122
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
14
DRM (Digital Rights Management)
MPEG audio
DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a
technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by
restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other the
PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to record
it. For detailed information, please see the instruction
manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other
WMA recording equipment) and/or software.
An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD
discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format
for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV
amp/receivers. See also PCM.
MPEG video
DTS
The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD
uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the
newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard.
DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround
system different from Dolby Digital that has become a
popular surround sound format for movies.
Optical digital output
A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light
pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks
using a special optical cord, available from specialist
audio dealers.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Dynamic range
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds
possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting
lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are
capable of a wide dynamic range, delivering dramatic
cinema-like effects.
The most common system of encoding digital audio,
found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a
lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital
and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio
recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amp/receivers with
digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and
MPEG audio to PCM. See also Digital audio.
EXIF (Exchangeable Image File)
A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still
cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers
use this compressed file format which carries date, time
and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data.
PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only)
A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through
on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good
for discs that you would normally not watch from
File extension
A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type
beginning to end all at once—karaoke discs, for example.
of file. For example, “.mp3” indicates an MP3 file.
Regions (DVD only)
ALL
2
(example region code marks)
ISO 9660 format
International standard for the volume and file structure of
CD-ROM discs.
Regions associate discs and players with particular
areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have
compatible region codes. You can find the region code of
your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are
compatible with more than one region (or all regions).
JPEG
A file format used for still images, such as photographs
and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file
extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”. Most digital cameras use this
format.
Sampling frequency
The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into
digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the
sound quality, but the more digital information is
generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency
of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples
MP3
MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file
format. Files are recognized by their file extension “.mp3”
or “.MP3”.
(measurements) per second. See also Digital audio.
123
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
14
Title
A collection of chapters on a the HDD/DVD disc. See also
Chapter.
Track
Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the
content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter.
See also Chapter.
WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an
audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using
Windows Media Player version 9 or Windows Media
Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by their file
extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
124
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Specifications
14
Tuner
Receivable channels
PAL B/G
PAL I
Frequency
Frequency
Channel
Channel
General
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
47 - 89 MHz
E2 - E4
X - Z
44 - 89 MHz
A - C
X - Z
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW,
Video-CD, Super VCD, CD,
104 - 300 MHz
E5 - E12
S1 - S20
M1 - M10
U1 - U10
104 - 300 MHz
D - J
11, 13
S1 - S20
CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA)
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
DVR-420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 W
DVR-520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 W
DVR-720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 W
Hyper
UHF
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
SECAM L
Frequency
SECAM D/K
Frequency
Channel
Channel
Power consumption in standby mode
0.68 W
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
49 - 65 MHz
2 - 4
49 - 94 MHz
R1 - R5
(Front panel display: off /Power Save Mode2)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 kg
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 (W) x 59 (H) x 339 (D) mm
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+5°C to +35°C
Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5% to 85%
(no condensation)
104 - 300 MHz
5 - 10
B - Q
104 - 300 MHz
R6 - R12
S1 - S20
Hyper
UHF
300 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
S21 - S41
21 - 69
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
TV system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/
NTSC (external input only)
Recording
Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Video Recording
DVD-VIDEO
STEREO
B/G - A2
I - NICAM
L - NICAM
B/G - NICAM
D/K - NICAM
Recordable discs
DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc)
DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc)
Timer
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)
Power off memory . . . .Approx. 5 years (after manufacture)
Video recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5MHz
Compression format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz
Compression format. . . . . . . . .Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
(uncompressed)
Input/Output
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . VHF/UHF set
75 Ω (IEC connector)
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jack (Input 2)
Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 Output
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 1 (AV1)
RCA jack (Output)
Recording time
HDD—DVR-720H
Fine (FINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 hours
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 hours
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34–204 hours
S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)
Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),
4 pin mini DIN (Input 2)
S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 / Output
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),
4 pin mini DIN (Output)
HDD—DVR-420H/520H
Fine (FINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 hours
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 102 hours
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17–102 hours
DVD-R/DVD-RW
Fine (FINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1–6 hours
RGB input
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1)
RGB output
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 1 (AV1)
125
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
14
Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R
Input level
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jacks (Input 2)
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1 Output
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),
RCA jacks (Output)
Control input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack
DV input/output (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4pin
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector
This connector provides the video and audio signals for
connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.
PIN no.
AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1)
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
Supplied accessories
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Warranty card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Operating Instructions
Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject
to change without notice, due to improvement.
126
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
15
Index
A
O
Adjusting the picture quality 94–96
Audio DRC 96
One Touch Copy 6, 21, 23, 61, 62–63, 116
One Touch Recording 7, 48
Audio language 23, 43, 105
Audio settings 103–105
Auto language 105, 106
Auto Scan - see Automatic channel setup
Automatic channel setup 25, 99
AV amplifier (connecting to) 19, 27
AV connector 12, 14–18, 98, 100, 102, 126
On-screen display (OSD) 33, 105
Optimized recording 7, 52, 65, 107, 116
Original content 7, 11, 23, 34, 76, 78, 79–83, 87
OSD - see On-screen display (OSD)
P
PAL 45, 46, 98, 99, 102, 103
PBC (PlayBack Control for Video CD) 32, 36, 123
PhotoViewer 90–91
B
Bilingual audio 22, 29, 44, 46, 48, 103, 104, 116
Picture quality - see Adjusting the picture quality
and Recording quality
Play List 7, 11, 22, 23, 34, 76, 79, 84–88
Play Mode menu 23, 40–42
Program play 41, 41–42
C
Camcorder - see DV camcorder
Changing TV channels 29, 112
Chase play - see Simultaneous recording and playback
Copy List 63–74, 108, 116
CPRM 46, 120
R
Recording 6–7, 28, 35, 45–60
Recording quality 46, 47, 94
Recovery recording 7, 49
Remote control 8, 23, 99
Repeat play 41, 42
D
Disc and file formats 9, 113
Disc compatibility - see Disc and file formats
Disc Navigator 36–37, 76–88, 108
Dolby Digital 6, 27, 43, 44, 46, 96, 104, 122
Downloading channel presets from the TV 13, 25, 100
DV camcorder 7, 20, 57, 58, 117
Rotating (a JPEG picture) 91
S
Scanning 24, 38
SCART - see AV connector
SECAM 45, 46, 98, 99, 102
Setting up 25–27, 112
Simultaneous recording and playback 6, 35, 55
Slow motion playback 39
Subtitle langauge 23, 43, 106
E
Easy Timer Recording 6, 50
Editing recordings 76–88
F
Finalizing discs 34, 59, 93
T
I
Timer recording 6, 13, 17, 22, 24, 35, 49–55, 56
TV aspect ratio 108, 113
Initializing discs 45, 60, 93, 108
Input colour system 98, 102
Input line system 98, 102, 103
TV audio channel 29, 48, 103, 104
TV system - see Input line system and Input colour system
J
V
JPEG picture files 7, 10, 35, 90–91, 123
Video mode 7, 9, 10, 22, 35, 45, 59, 60, 62, 93, 108,
116, 118
M
VIDEO Plus+ 6, 23, 52–53, 101
Video settings 94–96, 102–103
VPS/PDC 6, 22, 49, 51, 52, 55
VR mode 10, 22, 45, 48, 59, 60, 62, 79, 84, 93, 108,
109, 117, 118
Manual channel setup 100
Manual recording mode (MN) 22, 47, 107, 118
MP3 audio 7, 9, 32, 123
MPEG audio 12, 105, 123
N
W
NICAM audio 29, 103
WMA audio 7, 9, 32, 124
NTSC 22, 45, 46, 95, 96, 98, 102, 103
Z
Zooming (a JPEG picture) 91
127
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2004 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_A_En
Printed in the UK
<VRB1340-A>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|